Home

Paradyne 8785 Network Card User Manual

1. Slot 01 Slot 02 Slot 02 Slot 01 Front View Rear View without Bezel 98 15129 02 Fully Loaded 2 Slot Housing April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Slot 01 Slot 05 Front View without Bezel Fully Loaded 5 Slot Housing Slot 01 Slot 14 Front View Fully Loaded Access Carrier April 1998 About the T1 ol i o OE o S A o a lot 01 Sj s tU Rear View SAE VAS Access Mux Ground Screw and Label 98 15138 02 NEN AN 1 Slot 01 Rear View 98 15743 02 1 3 About the T1 Access Mux The 9161 Single T1 NAM is equipped with m One T1 network interface m One DSX 1 drop and insert port m Two DTE interface ports The 9261 Dual T1 NAM is equipped with m Two T1 network interfaces Two DTE interface ports 1 4 April 1998 a S JUR JA 16 496 15206 UAN CeeCee eje e 6 NOW ZLIN NOW LLIN 97 15645 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 There are six APM types The Synchronous Data APM which supports About the T1 Access Mux Four ports each supporting EIA 530A V 35 RS449 or V 11 X 21 Rates of Nx56 or Nx64 Standard RS232 like RFC 1659 MIB Enterprise MIB for testing statistics and some configuration functions See the 9109 Sync Data Application Module APM Installat
2. April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 DSX 1 TlInterface Channel Worksheet Menus and Configuration Worksheets DSX__ Channel Allocation DSX 1 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 D21 D22 D23 D24 April 1998 Menus and Configuration Worksheets April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 IP Addressing Selecting an IP Addressing Scheme You can select from many IP addressing schemes to provide SNMP NMS Telnet or FTP connectivity When selecting a scheme keep the following in mind m Because connection to remote devices is through different interfaces for EDL it may be necessary to assign IP addresses and subnet masks to each EDL individually m Avoid multiple EDL connections between the same two devices to prevent routing loops m Assign IP addresses on a per interface or T1 access unit basis m Although routing information is automatically passed between interconnected T1 access units from the network side make sure to set a route to the subnet s in the NMS s or local router s routing table The gateway to subnet s is through the T1 access unit connected to The LAN using a LAN adapter or To a router s terminal server s or NMS s direct PPP point to point protoco
3. Function Circuit Pin Number Receive ring from the network R1 1 Receive tip from the network T1 2 Transmit ring to the network 4 Transmit tip to the network 5 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments DSX 1 Port Interface The DSX 1 Port cable is a cable with a 15 pin DB15 on one end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Pin Receive tip from the DTE T1 1 Transmit tip to the DTE T 3 Shield 2 4 Receive ring from the DTE R1 9 Transmit ring to the DTE R 11 T1 Line Interface Cable RJ48C DA15P Plug Plug Unkeyed Receive Ring 1 Receive Ring Receive TIP Receive TIP White Blue Orange Transmit Ring Transmit Ring KX Ke White Orange White Orange 2 3 4 Transmit TIP 5 Transmit TIP 6 7 493 14342 01 The following table contains T1 Network Interface Connector information T1 Network Interface Connector DA15P Pin Number Signal RJ48C DA15P Receiver Ring 1 11 Receiver Tip 2 3 Transmitter Ring 4 9 Transmitter Tip 5 1 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 E 5 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments EIA 530A Port Interface The following table shows the EIA 530A circuit and pin assignments that are supported for a port connector interface Port 1 or Port 2 E 6
4. 9 39 OCU LOOPBACK 15 2 ihe sad oy heen ER ean dd Ee Aa eee ae 9 40 DSO GOD DACK exe eerte bise nas ams een Re eios 9 40 Line Eoopbaek esie rix rx RR RR REY RE Cv Eur 9 41 Data GO DOCK a sig oleo e ettet ede bete ete Et here ae 9 42 OCU DP Remote Loopback Tests uisssssellssesssssssee 9 42 IB Wie cac C E 9 42 Test MMEO 22sselzewekz9e ek e edi eta dane aur ert eni pps 9 43 staring and Stopping a TeSt 2 216m e Po ende obe E aa tete dos 9 43 Aborting All Tests eccesso eem eere E eaters 9 44 Determining Test Status and Results 0c cece eee eens 9 44 A Menus and Configuration Worksheets vi PRO ia say cadence PN PIE UI areal idiota is A 1 MEMU coetum Ep cto ue bci ree E bash dace pata A 2 Recording Configurations s once voe erre ep DER RIP RA LEER E A 3 Channel Assignments Worksheets 0000 eee eee eee eee eee A 15 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 B IP Addressing m Selecting an IP Addressing Scheme m P Addressing Scheme Examples C SNMP Traps D SNMP Cross Reference E Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments m GOM PO vius ce neREEROTEXRiwE Diese VERRUU COM Port to PC Cable sseseeenenn COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable DSX 1 Port Interface EIA 530A Port Interface EIA 530A to RS449 DTE Adapter Cable EIA 530A to X 21 DTE Adapter Cable m Voice APM Cables FXO FXS Voice APM Connector m OCU Port m T1 Mass Termination Cable RJ48H Co
5. Facility Data Link FDL Provides the management path over the FDL of the DS1 extended superframe ESF Using this method does not use any customer data bandwidth but requires end to end connectivity If you select this method you may need to work with your service provider to ensure that ESF framing is used and the required FDL management path exists end to end COM Port Provides a physical path over the communications port interface for local user interface access or network IP connectivity data management IP Connectivity Supports connectivity within an IP network for up to 300 IP host and or network routes Using the four management paths described above provides IP routing for SNMP Telnet and file transfer protocol FTP messages connectivity without requiring direct connections DSX 1 Drop and Insert port s allows DTEs PBXs that support the DS1 signal format to share the T1 network with other high speed equipment One DSX 1 port is provided on the 9161 T1 NAM The DSX APM for use with the 9261 T1 NAM provides two drop insert ports Alarm and Fault Condition Indication Provides the capability of attaching a terminal or printer to display print alarm messages Alarms or traps that are generated include power supply loss of signal out of frame alarm indication signal excessive error rate primary and secondary clock failure yellow alarm signal received misconfiguration and APM failure April 1998 9161 A2 G
6. displaying configuration opora Ea directory numbers 8 6 document conventions H AMAT download downloading software 8 9 Drop amp Insert 1 8 DS 0 Loopback DSX 1 assigning timeslots 5 39 interfaces configuring signaling assignments trunk conditioning worksheet DSX 1 channels 7 9 DSX 1 Interface configuring DSX 1 Interface cable and pin assignments DSX 1 Interface options 5 14 DSX 1 T1 Interface worksheet DTE loopback DTE Payload Loopback DTLB 9 28 DTPLB 9 29 Dual DSX APM E E amp M 50 Pin Amphenol Connector E 13 E amp M Voice APM E amp M voice port options E amp M voice ports configuring EDL management control April 1998 IN 3 Index EDL Management Link EER EIA 530A port connector interface E 6 Embedded Data Link EDL ending a session Enter key Enterprise Specific Traps 5 76 Enterprise Specific traps Equipment List Error Password Matching Esc key Escape Sequence 5 58 Escape Sequence Delay Sec 5 58 ESF Excessive Error Rate EER Alarm Excessive Error Rate Alarm Excessive Error Rate Threshold External Clock Rate 5 51 External Device configuring controlling access 6 4 setting up communication port for 5 57 External Device Commands External Device options F Facility Data Link FDL 1 8 fault condition indication FDL management control feature numbers 9261 Upgrade Kit acces
7. AIS at DSXss p An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by the DSX 1 interface in slot ss port p AIS is an unframed all ones signal Check the DTE attached to the DSX 1 interface EER at Networkn The error rate of the received network signal exceeds the currently configured threshold This condition only occurs if Network Interface 1 or 2 is configured for ESF framing This condition clears when the error rate falls below the threshold value Contact network provider Yellow at Networkn A yellow alarm signal is received on Network Interface 1 or 2 1 Network cable problem 2 Far end T1 access unit has lost framing sync on the T1 line 3 T1 facility problem 1 Check that your network cable is securely attached at both ends 2 Check the status of the far end device 3 Contact your network provider April 1998 7 19 Displaying System Information 7 20 Table 7 2 Health and Status Messages 3 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Yellow at DSXss p A yellow alarm signal is received on the DSX 1 interface in slot ss port p DTE has detected an LOS or OOF condition 1 Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends 2 Check the status of the attached equipment APM Card Failed Slot ss The NAM detects an APM failure for the identified slot 1 Check if APM is removed from the slot 2 Remove then
8. Code Description 04DU9 BN 1 544 Mbps superframe format SF without line power 04DU9 DN 1 544 Mbps SF and B8ZS without line power 04DU9 1KN 1 544 Mbps ANSI ESF without line power 04DU 1SN 1 544 Mbps ANSI ESF and B8ZS without line power The Federal Communication s Commission FCC requires that the end user person responsible for operation and maintenance of the equipment file an affidavit with the local exchange carrier when connecting unprotected Customer Premises Equipment CPE to the public T1 network The T1 equipment is considered an unprotected CPE because the analog through transmission gain paths associated with the voice cards are user adjustable This affidavit is required whenever digital terminal equipment without encoded analog content and billing protection is used to transmit digital signals containing encoded analog content which is intended for eventual conversion into voice band analog signals and retransmitted on the network This affidavit shall affirm that either no encoded analog content or billing information is being transmitted or that the output of the device meets Part 68 encoded analog content or billing protection specifications An affidavit form has been provided for your convenience 9161 A2 GH30 31 July 1998 D Important Regulatory Information A WARNING In order to maintain compliance with Part 68 FCC Rules and Industry Canada s CS 03 Specification the transmit gain settings associat
9. Specifies the highest access level allowed during a Telnet session Effective access level is the lower of either your personal or Telnet session access levels Level 1 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information change configuration options and run tests This is the highest access level allowed Use this setting when downloading files Level 2 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information and run tests only they cannot change configuration options Level 3 Allows Telnet access by users with Login ID access levels of 1 2 and 3 with the capability to view system information only they cannot change configuration options or run tests Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a Telnet session is disconnected after a specified period of keyboard inactivity NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions Enable Terminates Telnet session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not terminate Telnet session during inactivity Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 5 Determines the amount of keyboard inactive time before disconnecting Disconnect Time Minutes does not appear if Ina
10. 64KCC Loop OOF Slot ss Port p An Out of Frame OOF condition has been detected for the identified OCU DP interface 1 Check the that DSU is configured for the correct speed 2 Check the cable to ensure that the pairs are not crossed DDS Net Failure Slot SS Port p cccccc The identified OCU DP interface is receiving a DDS network code of cccccc from the network This is a 6 bit code representing bits 2 7 of the DSO code defined in AT amp T PUB 62310 The least significant bit is to the left Contact the DDS service provider Loss of Loop Timing Slot ss Port p cccccc The identified OCU DP interface cannot recover timing from the received signal on the local loop This typically occurs when the CPE CSU DSU is misconfigured for the wrong rate e g 19 2 kbps when the OCU DP is configured for 56K or Switched 56 operation Check that the CPE CSU DSU rate matches the OCU DP rate Primary Clock Failed A failure of the primary clock source configured for the NAM is detected and the secondary clock is providing the timing for the NAM This condition clears when the configured primary clock is restored 1 If the primary clock was derived from the network contact the network provider 2 Check the clock source connector Secondary Clock Failed A failure of the secondary clock source configured for the NAM is detected and the internal clock is providing the timing for
11. Application Module American Wire Gauge An indication of wire size The heavier the gauge the lower the AWG number and the lower the impedance Bursty Error Seconds A second in which more than one but less than 320 CRC6 error events have occurred Bipolar Violation In a bipolar signal a one mark pulse which has the same polarity as its predecessor Bipolar with Eight Zero Substitution Encoding scheme for transmitting clear channel signals over a T1 line Communications port A computer s serial communications port used to transmit to and receive data from a modem The modem connects directly to this port Device software that sets specific operating parameters for the device Sometimes referred to as straps Cyclic Redundancy Check A mathematical method of confirming the integrity of received digital data Controlled Slip Seconds A period in which a frame was added or deleted because of a variance in timing Channel Service Unit A device that connects service user equipment or a DSU to the local digital telephone loop Data Communications Equipment The equipment that provides the functions required to establish maintain and end a connection It also provides the signal conversion required for communication between the DTE and the network Direct Inward Dialing Dial Pulse Originating Dial Pulse Terminating Data Service Unit Data communications equipment that provides timing signal regeneration and an
12. 0 0 46 5 47 0 7 5 Default Setting 0 0 Determines the receive path analog signal amplification on the E amp M voice port in decibels This is the gain increased signal level or attenuation decreased signal level applied to the signal before it is presented to the user s analog equipment The range differs depending on the T1 NAM and E amp M software revision and the hardware revision Go to Main Menu Status Identity gt System amp NAM to view the revision levels Rx Gain dB only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 17 0 to 7 5 Increases or decreases the signal level The more positive the number the greater the signal level Tx Attenuation dB Possible Settings 17 0 716 5 16 0 715 5 15 0 0 0 46 5 47 0 7 5 Default Setting 0 0 Determines the amount of attenuation in dB that the E amp M voice receive port applies to the analog signal presented by the user s analog equipment transmit port Positive TX Attenuation settings reduce the level of the encoded analog signals sent towards the telephone network and negative settings will introduce gain The proper setting of this strap is crucial to ensuring compliance with Part 68 FCC Rules and Industry Canada s CS 03 Specification The range differs depending on the T1 NAM and E amp M software revision and the hardware revision Go to Main Menu Status Identity gt System amp NAM to vie
13. 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s to receive SNMP traps NMS n IP Address appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds to or changes the IP address for the trap manager The first digit i e xxx 255 255 255 cannot be 0 or 127 or greater than 223 However 000 is valid representing a null address Clear Clears the IP address and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 75 Setting Up Table 5 17 SNMP Trap Options 2 of 3 Destination Possible Settings Default COM FDL1 FDL2 DDL EDLss p Default Setting Default Specifies the network destination for the Trap Manager number configuration option Destination appears for each trap manager specified in the Number of Trap Managers configuration option Default Uses the default network COM Uses the communication port as the network destination This selection only appears if the Communication Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link FDL1 Uses FDL as the network destination on Network Interface 1 This selection only appears if the Management Link configuration option is set to FDL for the network interface see Table 5 1 FDL2 Uses FDL as the network destination on Network Interface 2 This selection
14. Circuit ITU 25 Pin Signal Mnemonic CCITT Direction Pin Shield 1 Transmitted Data TXD BA 103 To DCE 2 A 14 B Received Data RXD BB 104 From DCE 3 A 16 B Request to Send RTS CA 105 To DCE 4 A 19 B Clear to Send CTS CB 106 From DCE 5 A 13 B Data Set or DCE Ready CC 107 From DCE 6 DSR Signal Ground Common SG AB 102A 7 Received Line Signal Detector CF 109 From DCE 8 A RLSD or LSD 10 B Transmit Signal Element DA 113 To DCE 11 B Timing TXC DTE Source 24 A Transmitter Signal Element DB 114 From DCE 12 B Timing TXC DCE Source 15 A Receiver Signal Element DD 115 From DCE 17 A Timing RXC DCE Source 9 B Local Loopback LL LL 141 To DCE 18 Data Terminal or DTE CD 108 1 2 To DCE 20 Ready DTR Remote Loopback RL RL 140 To DCE 21 Signal Common AC 102B 22 23 Test Mode Indicator TM TM 142 From DCE 25 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments EIA 530A to V 35 DTE Adapter Cable Used as an interface between the 25 position EIA 530A Sync Data Port connector and a DTE s V 35 connector 12 Inches 25 Pin Plug Connector N 34 Position Socket Connector 496 14882a 530 DB25 MS34 V 35 SIGNAL PLUG SOCKET SIGNAL SHIELD SHIELD TD A TD A TD B TD B RD A RD A RD B RD B TXC A TXC A TXC B TXC B RXC A RXC A RXC B RXC B RTS RTS CTS CTS RLSD RLSD DSR DSR SIG COMMON SIG COMMON TT A TT A
15. The operating software no longer detects a misconfiguration enterprisePowerSupply 7 The power supply output voltage has dropped below the tolerance level Power supply problem enterprisePowerSupplyClear 107 The power supply output voltage alarm condition has cleared The power supply output voltage alarm condition has cleared enterprisePrimaryClockFail 1 A failure of the device s currently configured primary clock source Operating software has detected that the primary clock source has failed enterprisePrimaryClockFailClear 101 The failure of the device s currently configured primary clock source has cleared Operating software has detected that the primary clock source is now operational again enterpriseSecondaryClockFail 4 A failure of the device s currently configured secondary clock source Operating software has detected that the secondary clock source has failed enterpriseSecondaryClockFailClear 104 The failure of the device s currently configured secondary clock source has cleared Operating software has detected that the secondary clock source is now operational again enterpriseSelfTestFail 2 A hardware failure Unit has completed re initialization and a hardware failure was detected enterprise TestStart 5 A test is running At least one test has been started on an interface enterprise TestStop 105 All tests ha
16. or i HT 0x09 J or j LF or NL 0x0A K or k VT 0x0B L or l FF or NP 0x0C M or m CR 0x0D N or n SO OxOE O or o SI OxOF P or p DLE 0x10 Q or q DC1 0x11 R or r DC2 0x12 S or s DC3 0x13 T or t DC4 0x14 U or u NAK 0x15 V or v SYN 0x16 W or w ETB 0x17 X or x CAN 0x18 Y or y EM 0x19 AZ or z SUB Ox1A A One Ay ESC 0x1B v or FS 0x1C or GS 0x1D or A RS Ox1E US Ox1F April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Setting Up to Support a Telnet or FTP Session 9161 A2 GH30 30 Use the Telnet FTP Session Options screen to allow a Telnet or FTP session through an interconnected IP network These options also set up security for the Telnet or FTP session see Table 5 12 Only one Telnet session can be active at any one time gt Procedure 1 Set the Node IP Address Node Subnet Mask Default Network Destination and the Communication Protocol Port Link see Table 5 14 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display Management and Communication Communication Protocol Set the Telnet FTP configuration options see Table 5 12 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display User Interface Telnet Session 3 The Telnet FTP Session Options screen appears Enter the desired setting in each selected field Set the Port Use configuration option to Net Link see Table 5 10 Follow this menu selection sequence Configura
17. 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Considerations When Setting Up When setting up the system you need to 9161 A2 GH30 30 Arrange for T1 service Plan your channel map See Assigning Cross Connections on page 5 36 for more information Choose a management configuration Decide how you want to manage the system Locally through the T1 access unit s communications COM port either directly or remotely through a modem Through an asynchronous terminal interface or Telnet session or through an SNMP NMS Determine whether you want alarms generated and how you would like the system to communicate alarm information to an ASCII terminal printer or a management system Configuring for Alarms and Traps on page 5 64 tells you how to set alarms Determine whether you want traps generated and how you would like the system to communicate trap information to an ASCII terminal printer or a management system Setting Up for SNMP Management on page 5 70 tells you how to set SNMP traps If you are managing the system using an SNMP NMS or Telnet select an IP addressing scheme April 1998 5 1 Setting Up Selecting a Management Interface Select one of the following management interfaces m Asynchronous terminal interface Over the T1 access unit s COM port for local configuration and control when the system does not include an NMS An asynchronous terminal interface is also required for initial setup that enables exte
18. MODEL 916x 926x T1 ACCESS MUX TECHNICAL REFERENCE Document No 9161 A2 GH30 31 July 1998 Copyright 1998 Paradyne Corporation All rights reserved Printed in U S A Notice This publication is protected by federal copyright law No part of this publication may be copied or distributed transmitted transcribed stored in a retrieval system or translated into any human or computer language in any form or by any means electronic mechanical magnetic manual or otherwise or disclosed to third parties without the express written permission of Paradyne Corporation 8545 126th Avenue North P O Box 2826 Largo Florida 33779 2826 Paradyne Corporation makes no representation or warranties with respect to the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose Further Paradyne Corporation reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes from time to time in the contents hereof without obligation of Paradyne Corporation to notify any person of such revision or changes Changes and enhancements to the product and to the information herein will be documented and issued as a new release to this manual Warranty Sales and Service Information Contact your local sales representative service representative or distributor directly for any help needed For additional information concerning warranty sales service repair installation documentation
19. Speeds of 56 kbps and 64 kbps as well as 4 wire Switched 56 Enterprise MIB for testing and some configuration functions See the 9109 OCU DP Application Module APM Installation Instructions for more information g g Oc 9 Oo 9 NOTE The following NAM I O versions are required to use the 80 g OCU DP APM Os B SINGLE T1 NAM 870 3389 8000 for the KS 9161 Single T1 NAM Oo DUAL T1 NAM 870 2585 8000 for the 9261 Dual T1 NAM 98 15926 98 15927 The T1 access unit offers the following features 1 6 Upgradability There are three housings to select from 2 slot 5 slot and 14 slot access carrier You can start with a 2 slot housing and move your NAM and APM to a 5 slot housing at a later time Only NAMs may be used in a 14 slot housing The 2 slot housing holds one NAM and APM pair The 5 slot housing holds one NAM and up to four APMs allowing expansion capability as your network needs grow As you need additional DTE or voice ports for your network applications you can add APMs Modular Design Any NAM or APM can be physically removed from one housing and moved to another April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 About the T1 Access Mux Hot Swapping Provides the ability to insert and remove APMs without powering down the housing and without having to reconfigure the cards each time they are moved The APM configurations travel with the NAM When an APM is inserted or remove
20. Switch from the screen area to the screen function area and select or enter the designated screen function key See Switching Between Screen Work Areas for an example Press the spacebar to make the next valid choice April 1998 4 7 User Interface Switching Between Screen Work Areas Use Cirl a to switch between the two screen work areas to perform all screen functions B gt Procedure 1 2 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the screen function key area Select either the function s designated underlined character or Tab to the desired function key Example Enter e or E to Exit Press Return The function is performed To return to the screen area press Ctrl a again Accessing the User Interface T1 access unit connectivity can be established via a directly connected terminal However if for some reason you cannot access the user interface do one of the following Reset COM Port Allows you to reset the configuration options related to COM port usage This also causes a device reset where the T1 access unit performs a Device Self Test No security related configuration options are changed Reload Factory Defaults Allows you to reload the Default Factory Configuration resetting all of the configuration and control settings This method is also useful when the user s password s have been forgotten Selecting this method also causes a device reset B gt Procedure To reset COM
21. The rear I O panel has provision for a permanently connected protective earthing grounding conductor Connect a 6 14 AWG conductor to this solderless lug connector identified by the protective earth symbol Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation To ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating these slots and openings must not be blocked or covered Always install the housings in a vertical upright position to allow for proper cooling Do not allow anything to rest on the power cord and do not locate the product where persons will walk on the power cord General purpose cables are provided with this product Special cables which may be required by the regulatory inspection authority for the installation site are the responsibility of the customer Use a minimum 26 AWG line cord for network connections When installed in the final configuration the product must comply with the applicable Safety Standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is installed If necessary consult with the appropriate regulatory agencies and inspection authorities to ensure compliance Arare phenomenon can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or more buildings If products installed in separate buildings are interconnected the voltage potential may cause a hazardous condition Consult a qualified electrical consultant to determine whether or not th
22. The second page of the DSX 1 to Network 1 2 Assignments screen enables you to define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each timeslot on the DSX 1 interface You can specify whether robbed bit signaling information is being passed within a given DSO and the value of the signaling bits that will be transmitted for that DSO to the other cross connected T1 interface if a Carrier Group Alarm CGA occurs on a T1 interface Only those DSX 1 to Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this page from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order by network and timeslot When a CGA condition LOS OOF or AIS is declared for a T1 interface the signaling bits being transmitted to the other T1 interface for the DSO are forced to idle for two seconds except for user defined patterns which are transmitted immediately This drops any call in progress The signaling bits are then forced to the selected state Busy or Idle and remain in this state until the CGA condition clears At this point the received signaling bits from the T1 interface which formerly had the CGA condition are passed through to the other T1 interface NOTE Trunk conditioning will only occur on DSOs that are cross connected to another T1 interface All other DSOs remain unaffected by trunk conditioning Enter one of the values shown in Table 5 8 in each of the fields on both the Network side and the DSX 1 side Although you can choose any value f
23. When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen 6 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Security See Limiting Async Terminal Direct Access on page 6 1 if you want to limit access to the dial in session Refer to Setting Up the Communication Port to Support an External Device in Chapter 5 Setting Up for more information Controlling SNMP Access The T1 access unit supports SNMP Version 1 which only provides limited security through the use of community names There are three methods for limiting SNMP access Disabling SNMP Access 9161 A2 GH30 30 Disabling SNMP access Assigning SNMP community names and access levels Assigning IP addresses of NMSs that can access the unit The General SNMP Options screen provides the configuration option to disable SNMP access to the unit When this configuration option is disabled the access unit will not respond to any SNMP messages and will not send SNMP traps p Procedure To disable SNMP access 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 Follow this menu selection sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display Management and Communication General SNMP Management The General SNMP Management Options screen appears Set the SNMP
24. 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the unit when the port is configured as a network communication link The subnet mask is only in effect when the Communication Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link see Table 5 10 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which you can view or edit Clear Clears the subnet mask for the communication port and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros i e 000 000 000 000 the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Communication Port Link Protocol Possible Settings PPP SLIP Default Setting PPP Specifies the link layer protocol to use when the communication port is configured as a network communication link PPP Point to Point Protocol SLIP Serial Line IP Protocol This protocol is only in effect when the Communication Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link see Table 5 10 Alternate Communication Port IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate IP address for the communication port The Alternate IP Address is used when a call attempt does not complete on the primary alarm trap tel
25. 12 596 1 DSX 1 cable problem 1 Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends 2 No signal being transmitted 2 Check the DTE status from the DTE OOF at Networkn An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on Network Interface 1 or 2 1 Incompatible framing format 1 Check that the framing between the network and format for the network the T1 access unit interface is correct 2 Network cabling problem 2 Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends 3 T1 facility problem 3 Contact your network provider 7 18 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Table 7 2 Health and Status Messages 2 of 5 Displaying System Information Message What It Indicates What To Do OOF at DSXss p An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface in slot ss port p 1 Incompatible framing format between the DTE and the T1 access unit 2 DSX 1 cabling problem 1 Check that the framing format for the DSX 1 DTE interface is correct 2 Check that the DSX 1 cable is securely attached at both ends AIS at Networkn An Alarm Indication Signal AIS is received by Network Interface 1 or 2 AIS is an unframed all ones signal 1 Upstream T1 access unit is transmitting AIS keep alive signal 2 The network is transmitting an AIS 1 Check status of upstream T1 access unit s 2 Report problem to carrier
26. An alarm is generated when a DDS Network Failure code is received from the network Disable Alarms are not generated for a DDS Network Failure Loss of Loop Timing Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when a Loss of Loop Timing condition is received from the network Loss of Loop Timing Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Enable An alarm is generated when a Loss of Loop Timing condition is detected on the interface Disable Alarms are not generated for a Loss of Loop Timing condition 5 34 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Copying Port Configurations 9161 A2 GH30 30 gt Procedure Copy Ports provides an easy way to configure similar ports Only enabled ports may be copied They may be copied to either enabled or disabled ports 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display Copy Ports The Copy Ports screen appears Select the desired slot number to copy configuration options from Upon entering the screen the slot number of the T1 NAM is displayed Use the spacebar to cycle through the slots You can also type in the desired slot number Select the desired port number to copy configuration options from Use the spacebar to cycle through the ports available on the card in the selected slot Only slots matching the type shown in the From field are displ
27. C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Power Consumption 3 5 watts 0 29 amps input current at 12 volts DSX 1 Interface Physical Interface Framing Format Coding Format DTE Line Equalization Send AIS 15 position DB15 subminiature connector DB15 socket D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 to 196 5 meters Selectable April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Technical Specifications Specification Criteria Voice APMs Weight E amp M APM 14 oz 397 kg FXO APM 1 Ib 454 kg FXS APM 1 Ib 454 kg Voice I O card 6 oz 170 kg Size E amp M FXO FXS APM 11 58 x 8 00 29 41 cm x 20 32 cm Voice I O card 2 90 x 10 15 7 37 cm x 25 78 cm Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 35 F to 122 F 1 7 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Cable Length Maximum cable length 18 000 feet using 26 AWG Power Consumption E amp M APM FXO APM FXS APM 8 lines talking FXS APM 8 lines ringing 3 1 watts 0 26 amps input current at 12 volts 3 5 watts 0 29 amps input current at 12 volts 10 1 watts 0 84 amps input current at 12 volts 13 3 watts 1 11 amps input current at 12 volts Interface Connector 50 pin amphenol connector RJ27X Op
28. Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold ASCII Alarm Messages Com Port Disable Alarm amp Trap Dial Out Enable Disable Trap Disconnect Enable Disable Call Retry Enable Disable Dial Out Delay Time Min 1 10 5 Alternate Dial Out Directory None 1 5 System Alarm Relay Enable Disable 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 A 13 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Device Name Management and Communication Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold Communication Protocol See Table 5 14 Node IP Address 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Node Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Network Destination None COM FDL1 FDL2 DDL EDLss p Communication Port IP Address 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Communication Port Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Communication Port Link Protocol PPP SLIP Alternate Communication Port IP 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Address Alternate Communication Port 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Subnet Mask General SNMP Management See Table 5 15 SNMP Management Enable Disable Community Name 1 ASCII text entry Public Clear Name 1 Access Read Read Write Community Name 2 ASCII text entry Clear Name 2 Access Read Read Write SNMP NMS Security See Table
29. Default Setting 0 0 Determines the amount of attenuation in dB that the FXS voice port applies to the analog signal presented by the user s analog equipment Positive TX Attenuation settings reduce the level of the encoded analog signals sent towards the telephone network and negative settings introduce gain When connecting permissive mode modems and fax machines a setting of 3 dB should result in a compliant encoded analog of less than 12 dBm The proper setting of this strap is crucial to ensuring compliance with Part 68 FCC Rules and Industry Canada s CS 03 Specification Tx Attenuation dB only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 10 00 to 5 0 Increases or decreases the signal level The more negative the number the greater the signal level opposite of Rx Gain settings Ring Back Tone Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Allows generation of an audible tone toward the network in response to an incoming call request normally referred to as a ring back This feature is invoked only when the central office CO does not provide it as with a Class 4 ESS switch This tone indicates to the calling party that the called line has been reached and ringing has started Use the ring back tone when you have a PLAR application Ring Back Tone only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Enable Generates a ring back tone toward the network in response to an incoming cal
30. NET2 IN Network 2 In An intrusive test jack that allows insertion of a signal toward equipment attached to the Network 2 interface by external test equipment NET2 OUT Network 2 Out An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from equipment attached to the Network 2 interface and allows it to be terminated by external test equipment NET2 MON IN Network 2 Monitor In A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal going into the equipment attached to the Network 2 interface NET2 MON OUT Network 2 Monitor Out A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal coming out of the equipment attached to the Network 2 interface April 1998 9 5 Troubleshooting DSX 1 and DSX 2 Interface LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means SIG Signal Green ON A recoverable signal is present on the DSX1 DSX2 interface OFF The signal cannot be recovered from the DSX1 DSX2 interface An LOS condition exists OOF Out of Frame Yellow ON Atleast one OOF was detected during the sampling period OFF No OOFs were detected during the sampling period ALM Dual DSX APM LEDs 9 9 9 O Test a Jacks 7 9 5 9 2e g 5 e g Q o 4 LEDs 97 15642 01 9 6 Alarm Yellow ON An alarm condition is present on the DSX1 DSX2 interface Current alarm conditions Loss of Signal L
31. Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when a loss of signal condition is detected on the network interface Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message Out of Frame OOF Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm is generated when an out of frame condition is detected on the network interface Enable Generates an alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 11 Setting Up Table 5 1 Network Interface Options 6 of 7 Alarm Indication Signal AIS Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when an alarm indication signal condition is detected on the network interface Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message Yellow Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when a yellow alarm condition is detected on the network interface Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message Excessive Error Rate EER Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether a
32. Statistics are also collected to help you determine how long a problem has existed See Chapter 7 Displaying System Information for information on statistics These features ensure that your T1 access unit is giving you optimum performance in your network How Do I Know There Is a Problem 9161 A2 GH30 30 The T1 access unit offers three major mechanisms that alert you to possible problems m LEDs m Alarms m SNMP Traps If monitoring the system the System and Test Status screen can also indicate that there is a problem Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status April 1998 9 1 Troubleshooting T1 NAM LEDs General Status LEDs 9 Label Indication Color What It Means 9 OK Power and Green ON NAM has power and is operational ional Ae 9 ao OFF NAM is in a power up self test or there is a g Test failure 29 Jacks CYCLING The unit is in Minimum mode Requires an z 9 FTP download z 2s ALM System Red ON NAM has just been reset or an error or fault 2 Failure has been detected 25 Self Test g OFF No failures have been detected TST Test Mode Yellow ON Loopback or test pattern in progress initiated locally remotely or from the network OFF No tests are active BKP Backup Yellow Not supported in this release Remains off except during LEDs a Lamp Test 496 15051 9 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 TAN
33. entered 3 consecutive times The current Telnet session is closed The User Interface Idle screen appears with a directly connected terminal An external modem is disconnected An SNMP trap will be generated if so configured Access is denied See your system administrator to verify your login Login ID Password combination Logging Out When a login is required and a timeout occurs you are automatically logged out You will be prompted for your login next time you try to use the interface You can also end a session using the screen function area of the user interface p Procedure To log out 1 Press Ctrl a to switch from the screen area to the screen function key area 2 Select Exit by entering e or E and pressing Return The session is ended Starting a Session Depending on how your T1 access unit is configured you can start a session using one of the following methods m Dialing in through an external modem to the COM port m Direct connection over the COM port m Telnet session over the COM port m Telnet session through an in band management channel through the T1 network 8 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 B gt Procedure Operation and Maintenance Upon beginning a session the User Interface Idle screen is displayed To activate 1 Press Return 2 One of the following occurs If Then What to do now Security is disabled The M
34. only appears if the Management Link configuration option is set to FDL for the network interface see Table 5 1 DDL Uses DDL as the network destination This selection only appears if the management link configuration option is set to DDL for the Network interface see Table 5 1 EDLss p Uses EDL as the network destination for the synchronous port in slot ss port p This selection only appears if the EDL Management Link configuration option is set to Enable for the given slot and port see Table 5 3 NOTE Ifthe selected network destination link is disabled the SNMP traps are discarded Ensure that an operational link is selected as the default route or change the default route if the link becomes nonoperational General Traps Possible Settings Disable Warm AuthFail Both Default Setting Both Determines if SNMP trap messages for warmStart and or authenticationFailure events are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Disable Does not send trap messages for warmStart or AuthenticationFailure events Warm Sends trap messages for warmStart events AuthFail Sends trap messages for authenticationFailure events Both Sends trap messages for both warmStart and AuthenticationFailure events Enterprise Specific Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines if trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events are sent to the currently configured tra
35. or 2 DSXss p The port is assigned to the DSX 1 interface in slot ss always 01 port p on a clear channel time slot Ports cannot be cross connected to the DSX APM SssPp The port to port assignment of the slot ss and sync data port p shown in this field 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 1 Displaying System Information Displaying Device Name and SNMP System Identification Information Use the Device Name screen to display the name of the device SNMP system name location and contact name for the device Use the following menu sequence to display device name and SNMP system identification information Main Menu Control 5 Device Name The following information is available for viewing View this field To find the administratively assigned Device Name Name of the device for device identification System Name Name for this SNMP managed node System Location Physical location of this SNMP managed node System Contact System contact person for this SNMP node Viewing Network and Sync Data Performance Statistics Use the Network Performance Statistics screen to display a complete view of the performance of the network interface and the port interface over the previous 24 hour period Use the Sync Data Performance Statistics screen to display a complete view of the performance of the network interface and the port interface over the previous 8 hour period Statistics are defin
36. provided an LLB can be performed in the T1 access unit s current state Receiving a LLB Release command terminates the LLB Disable The T1 access unit ignores the LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the NAM is not in compliance with ANSIT1 403 or AT amp T TR 62411 5 8 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 1 Network Interface Options 3 of 7 Network Initiated PLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the payload loopback PLB to be controlled by the receipt of PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands from the network Network Initiated PLB only appears if Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable PLB is controlled by PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands Receiving a PLB Actuate command causes the T1 access unit to enter a payload loopback provided a PLB can be performed in the NAM s current state Receiving a PLB Release command terminates the PLB Disable The T1 access unit ignores the PLB Actuate and PLB Release commands NOTE When disabled the unit is not in compliance with ANSIT1 403 or AT amp T TR 54016 Transmit Timing Possible Settings System Network Default Setting System Allows transmit timing to be selected from either the system master clock source or from the currently selected network interface Transmit Timing only appears for the 9261 Dual T1 NAM System T
37. recording restoral saving options Sync Data Ports upload download voice ports 5 24 Configuration options accessing and displaying changing Configuration Worksheets configure alarms traps April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Connect Indication String Connect Prefix Connection Refused connectivity IP connector E amp M voice APM EIA 530A Port merece ES FXO FXS voice APM T1 Network Interface E 5 Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits Control keys menu branch control external device access SNMP access control characters 5 60 Copy Ports 5 35 worksheet creating a management link login Cross Connect Status cross connections cross reference SNMP MIB to user interface command D DA15P data selection criteria 4 3 Data Channel Loopback Data Loopback data port tests Data Rate date setting Date amp Time screen DCLB DDL DDS Network Failure Alarm OCU DP Default Network Destination 5 68 Delete key deleting a on Ba Destination Device Name 7 12 device name changing Device Tests Dial In Access 5 57 Dial Out Delay Time Min 5 65 9161 A2 GH30 30 Index Dial In Access 6 4 dialing out alarms automatic SNMP Traps 8 5 Digital Loopbacks Direct Data Link DDL Direct Inward Dial DID Directory Numbers changing displaying 8 6 disabling SNMP access 6 5 Disconnect String 5 59 Disconnect Time
38. test is active on slot ss port p Networkn PLB Test Active A network Payload Loopback PLB test is active on specified Network interface n DSXss p PLB Test Active A DSX 1 Payload Loopback PLB test is active on slot ss port p Networkn RLB Test Active A network Repeater Loopback RLB test is active on specified network interface n DSXss p RLB Test Active A DSX 1 Repeater Loopback RLB test is active on slot SS port p DCLB Slot ss Port p A Data Channel Loopback DCLB test is active on slot ss port p DTLB Slot ss Port p A Data Terminal Loopback DTLB test is active on slot ss port p DTPLB Slot ss Port p A Data Terminal Payload Loopback DTPLB test is active on slot ss port p Latching OCU LB Slot ss Port p A Latching OCU Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p Non Latching OCU LB Slot ss Port p A Nonlatching OCU Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p Latching CSU LB Slot ss Port p A Latching CSU Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p Non Latching CSU LB Slot ss Port p A Nonlatching CSU Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p Latching DSU LB Slot ss Port p A Latching DSU Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p Non Latching DSU LB Slot ss Port p A Nonlatching DSU Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p
39. 1573 m ifType RFC 1573 dsx1LineStatus RFC 1406 linkDown One or more alarm conditions are active on the interface Alarm conditions include Loss of Signal LOS Out of Frame OOF Alarm Indication Signal AIS Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow Alarm linkUp No alarms on the interface April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Traps linkUp Down Interface Variable Bindings Possible Cause Synchronous m iflndex RFC 1573 linkDown One or more Data Ports alarm conditions are active on m ifAdminStatus the port Supported by the RFC 1573 MET f ia ifi Alarm conditions include media specific ifOperS REC 1573 RS232 Like MIB ifOperStatus pTR oft m ifType RFC 1573 RTS Off Out of Frame OOF for the Embedded Data Link EDL 2 Excessive Error Rate for the Embedded Data Link EDL 2 linkUp No alarms on the port OCU Ports m iflndex RFC 1573 linkDown One or more Represented by an ifAdminStatus set aS are activeon entry in the MIB II RFC 1573 Al diti celi arm conditions include interfaces table m ifOperStatus RFC 1573 Loss of Signal m ifType RFC 1573 Abnormal Station Code 64KCC Loop OOF DDS Net Failure Loss of Loop Timing linkUp No alarms on the port 1 The DTR alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the DTE supports the DTR l
40. 1578 9Pbacks OCU Loopback ifType RFC 1573 g p DS 0 Loopback devOcuTestType devOcu mib Line Loopback Data Loopback Remote Latching CSU DSU and OCU Loopbacks Remote Nonlatching CSU DSU and OCU Loopbacks Send pattern tests Monitor pattern tests Voice Ports m iflndex RFC 1573 Digital Loopback ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 devVoiceTestType devVoice mib Send DRS tone to T1 interface Analog Loopback Line Loopback and user Send quiet tone to T1 interface and user Monitor pattern tests April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Cross Reference This appendix provides a correlation between how a function is performed or status is displayed on the user interface and how the same function is accomplished using access to the SNMP database Table D 1 SNMP objects are displayed in bold type while values for SNMP objects are displayed in italics Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 1 of 16 LOS at Net DSX 1 OOF at Net DSX 1 AIS at Net DSX 1 EER at Net Yellow at Net DSX 1 APM Card Failed Module MisConfig Module Unsupported OOF EDL Out of Sync Slot xx Group g EER EDL Loss of Signal ss p Abnormal Station Code ss p 64KCC Loop OOF ss p DDS Net Failure xxxxxx ss p Loss of Loop Timing ss p Primary Clock Failed Secondary Clock Failed Network Com Link Down Device Fail User Interfac
41. 4 4 4 4 System and ia Status 77 system error system MESE T System eas a 16 Test Status 7 24 test status MIB to user interface command cross reference MIB objects network and dsx tests Minimum Mode Mode Minimum Model number NAM Monitor Pattern DSX 1 interface Network interface Sync Data Port monitoring N NAM control file identity information Program Hi Bank Program Low MEET removal 8 9 upgrade nam1 ctl ocd nam2 low ocd nam3 hi ocd Name 1 Access Name 2 Access Name Access navigating screens Network signaling assignments 5 43 trunk conditioning network channels Management performance statistics 7 12 worksheet IN 6 April 1998 Network Initiated Data Channel Loopback Network Initiated LLB Network Initiated PLB Network Interface cable and pin assignments Network interface assigning timeslots Ma options network management Network T1 Interface worksheet A 16 Network Time Slot NMS security set E NMS IP Address 6 8 NMS IP Validation 5 72 NMS n IP Address em No Security Records to Delete 9 18 Test Active status Node IP Address Node Subnet Mask Nonlatching Loopback Number of Managers 6 8 Number of Trap Managers O OCU Loopback 9 40 OCU DP tests OCU DP options OCU DP ports assigning configure worksheet OCU DP tests send Latching Me E start loopback tests stop loopback tests
42. 5 16 NMS IP Validation Enable Disable Number of Managers 1 10 1 NMS n IP Address 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Access Level Read Read Write SNMP Traps See Table 5 17 SNMP Traps Enable Disable Number of Trap Managers 1 6 t NMS n IP Address 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Destination Default COM FDL1 FDL2 DDL EDLss p General Traps Disable Warm AuthFail Both Enterprise Specific Traps Enable Disable Link Traps Disable Up Down Both Link Traps Interfaces Network DSX 1 T1s Ports AII after performing a Clear 1 The first byte cannot be set to 0 nor 127 However the null address of 0 0 0 0 is valid April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Channel Assignments Worksheets Use the following worksheets to record cross connection assignments See Assigning Cross Connections in Chapter 5 Setting Up for more information 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 A 15 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Network T1 Interface Channel Worksheet Network Channel Allocation Signaling and Trunk Conditioning N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 N6 N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 N15 N16 N17 N18 N19 N20 N21 N22 N23 N24
43. 7 Maintenance and Troubleshooting contains a list of all status messages and recommended action for you to take Use the following menu sequence to display system and test status information Main Menu Status System and Test Status Displaying Voice APM Status Use the Voice APM Status screen to display information concerning voice cards that you have installed in your system p Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence to display the Voice APM Status screen Main Menu Status Voice Status 2 Enter the slot number of the desired voice APM in the SLOT field The Voice Port Status screen differs depending on whether you are accessing an E amp M FXO or FXS Voice APM View this field To find the For the E amp M Voice APM Port Status Status of the port Assigned To Interface the port is assigned to Operating Mode Operating mode of the voice port that was configured using the Operating Mode configuration option on the Voice Ports screen See the Technical Reference for configuration information Signaling Type Type of signaling used by the voice port that was configured using the switches on the E amp M APM See the 9109 E amp M Analog Voice Application Module APM Installation Instructions for more information Call Progress Current condition of the port TX ABCD bits Current value of the ABCD bits that are being transmitted to the T1 interface RX ABCD bits Current value
44. 9001 F 1 890 Universal 2 5 slot Wall Mount Kit 9008 F 1 893 Power Supplies 120 Vac Power Supply for 2 slot housing 9002 F1 020 120 Vac Power Supply for 5 slot housing 9005 F1 020 DC Power Supply for 5 slot housing 9005 F1 050 Universal Power Supply for Access Carrier 9007 F1 040 T1 NAMs 9161 Single T1 Network Access Module NAM 9161 B1 902 9261 Dual T1 Network Access Module NAM 9261 B1 902 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Equipment List Equipment Feature Number APMs High Speed Synchronous Data Application Module APM 9109 F 1 604 FXS Analog Voice Application Module APM 2 Wire 9109 F 1 648 FXO Analog Voice Application Module APM 2 Wire 9109 F 1 658 E amp M Analog Voice Application Module APM 4 Wire 9109 F 1 668 Dual DSX Application Module APM 9109 F 1 692 OCU DP 2 Port Application Module APM 9109 F1 622 OCU DP 6 Port Application Module APM 9109 F 1 626 Manual Model 916x 926x T1 Access Mux Technical Reference paper 9161 M2 001 9161 A2 GH30 April 1998 G 3 Equipment List G 4 Equipment Feature Number Cable Part Number Cables Connectors Network Interface Cable 20 ft 3100 F 1 500 035 0209 2031 V 35 Interconnect Cable 1 ft 3100 F 1 570 035 0244 0031 V 11 X 21 Interconnect Cable 1 ft 3100 F1 571 035 0302 0131 RS449 Interconnect Cable 1 ft 3100 F 1 580 035 0245 0031
45. A2 GH30 30 April 1998 6 9 Security 6 10 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying System Information Displaying System and NAM Identity Information Use the System amp NAM Identity screen to display identification information about the system and T1 NAM This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement units and or making firmware upgrades Use the following menu sequence to display System and NAM identity information Main Menu Status Identity gt System amp NAM View this field To find the System Name System name configured for the unit System Contact Contact person for the unit System Location System location of the unit Model Number NAM s 4 digit model number 9161 or 9261 Serial Number NAM s 7 digit serial number Software Revision NAM s software version Hardware Revision NAM s hardware version The above information is entered using the following menu sequence Main Menu Control Device Name 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 1 Displaying System Information Displaying APM Identity Information Use the APM Identity screen to display identification information about a particular APM This information is useful if you are purchasing additional or replacement APMs p Procedure 1 Follow this menu sequence to display the APM Identity Slot screen Main Menu Status gt Identity APM 2 Press the spacebar to cycle through the se
46. Code DSO is detected on the operational has been received at the specified OCU DP 2 Check the f d OCU DP port in slot ss port Check the far en cable to the DSU port p month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Abnormal Station Code at OCU DP port in slot ss port p month day year An Alarm Indication Check the status of 6 Net hours minutes seconds Signal condition is the far end unit If 7 DSX 1 Alarm Indication Signal detected on the necessary contact AIS received at the specified Network or network provider for Network 1 Network 2 DSX 1 interface Network interface Interface or at the DSX 1 Interface in slot ss port p Check the DTE attached to the DSX 1 interface month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Alarm Indication Signal AIS at the Network 1 Network 2 Interface or at the DSX 1 Interface in slot ss port p month day year An APM card failure is 1 Check that the APM 11 hours minutes seconds detected for the card is seated An APM Card Failure has identified slot properly been detected for slot ss 2 Contact your service representative month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for an APM Card Failure for slot ss April 1998 9 13 Troubleshooting 9 14 Table 9 1 ASCII Alarm M
47. IP address and a subnet mask assigned Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Management and Communication See Table 5 12 Telnet FTP Session Options in Chapter 5 Setting Up In addition if you want to access the configuration files upload download or download new firmware files to the T1 access unit you must set the FTP Session configuration option to Enable Configuring an External Device Connected to the COM Port 9161 A2 GH30 30 The T1 access unit can be managed remotely by connecting an external device like a modem or PAD packet assembly disassembly facility to the COM port T1 Access Unit Simple ASCII Interface WAN Link SNMP NMS le VT100 Emulation and Telnet or NMS using SNMP External Modem 97 15188 01 Using this out of band example configure call processing using the following pertinent configuration options configured from the user interface Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration User Interface External Device COM Port External Device Commands Dial In Access Port Usage See Table 5 11 External Device COM Port Options in Chapter 5 Setting Up April 1998 2 3 Management and Control Configuring End to End Management Control When managing the T1 access unit remotely you can establish a management link across the network in one of three ways You can m Use the Facility Data Link FDL for a point to point ESF T1 link m Use a
48. Interface month day year An excessive error There is a network 14 hours minutes seconds rate occurred on the problem with the An Excessive Error Rate synchronous data port fractional portion of EER has been detected at for the identified slot the link carrying this synchronous data port in and port port s data Contact slot ss port p network provider month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Excessive Error Rate EER at synchronous data port in slot ss port p month day year The specified Check that the CPE 20 hours minutes seconds OCU DP port cannot CSU DSU rate A Loss of Loop Timing has recover timing from matches the OCU DP been detected at OCU DP the received signal on rate port in slot ss port p the local loop month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Loss of Loop Timing at OCU DP port in slot ss port p April 1998 9 15 Troubleshooting 9 16 Table 9 1 ASCII Alarm Messages 4 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Priority month day year LOS condition 1 Check the cable to 16 hours minutes seconds A detected the OCU DP port Loss Of Signal LOS has been detected at the Contact network OCU DP port in slot ss provider port p month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Clea
49. Level4 Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Inactivity Timeout Enable Disable Disconnect Time Minutes 4 9 1 60 5 External Device COM Port See Table 5 11 External Device Commands Disable AT Other Dial In Access Enable Disable Connect Prefix 7 ASCII text entry Clear Connect Indication String ASCII text entry Clear Escape Sequence ASCII text entry Clear Escape Sequence Delay Sec None 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 Disconnect String ASCII text entry Clear 1 Only shown when Port Use is set to Net Link 2 Only shown when Clock Source is set to Internal 3 Only shown when Port Type is set to Asynchronous Only shown when Port Use is set to Terminal 5 Only shown when Inactivity Timeout is set to Enable 6 Only shown when External Device Commands is set to Other or AT 7 Only shown when External Device Commands is set to Other April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Device Name e erface ont d Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold Telnet FTP Sessions See Table 5 12 Telnet Session Enable Disable Telnet Login Required Enable Disable Session Access Level Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Inactivity Timeout Enable Disable Disconnect Time Minutes 1 60 5 FTP Session Enable Disable FTP Login Required Enable Disable
50. Loopback PLB loops the information received on the Network or DSX 1 interface back to the network after it has passed through the receive and transmit framing section of the device Use PLB for determining whether the problem is with the T1 facility or in the circuitry of the remote device Framer DSX All PLB Network Port 5 Interface gt All 1s All 1s DCE DCE Port 2 Port 1 496 15198 The following tests cannot be running when a payload loopback test is initiated m Line Loopback or Repeater Loopback on the same Network or DSX 1 interface m Send Pattern Test on the same Network or DSX 1 interface or any data port assigned to this interface m Send Remote Line Loopback on the same Network or DSX 1 interface m Send V 54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any data port assigned to this Network or DSX 1 interface m Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to the same Network or DSX 1 interface CAUTION Payload Loopback may affect the operation of the FDL DDL or EDL Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted Also any performance statistics being sent over the EDL will be disrupted 9 24 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Repeater Loopback The Repeater Loopback RLB loops the information to be sent over the Network or DSX 1 interface back to the device The RLB loops the entire data stream which includes data on the interface as well as the synchronous data ports Use RLB
51. Management Options see Table 5 15 to specify what is needed to allow the system to be managed as an SNMP agent by an NMS supporting the SNMP protocol Configuration Edit Display Management and Communication General SNMP Management Table 5 15 General SNMP Management Options 1 of 2 SNMP Management Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether SNMP can be used for management of the T1 access unit Enable The T1 access unit can be managed as an SNMP agent by an SNMP compatible NMS Disable The T1 access unit will not respond to SNMP messages or send SNMP traps Community Name 1 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting public in ASCII text entry Specifies the first of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the unit s Management Information Base MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever that manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII Text Field Adds to or changes the Community 1 name maximum 255 characters Clear Clears the Community Name 1 field Name 1 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for community name 1 This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using the Community Name 1 configuration option Read Allows read only access to the obj
52. Mass Termination Cable A T1 mass termination cable is available to connect up to seven NAMs mounted in a 9000 Series Access Carrier to an M66 block The T1 mass termination cable is a 5 foot RJ48H cable consisting of a 50 pin plug at one end and seven RJ48C plugs at the other end The following shows pin assignments for the RJ48H connector RJ48H Connector Pinouts for T1 Mass Termination Cable E 26 Circuits Line TI RV T R4 1 26 1 39 14 2 27 2 40 15 3 28 3 41 16 4 29 4 42 17 5 30 5 43 18 6 31 6 44 19 7 32 7 45 20 1 Receive Tip from Network Receive Ring from Network 3 Transmit Tip to Network Transmit Ring to Network April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Technical Specifications 9161 A2 GH30 30 Specification Criteria Network Access Module NAM Approvals FCC Part 15 FCC Part 68 Industry Canada Class A digital device Refer to the equipment s label for the Registration Number Refer to the equipment s label for the Certification Number UL Refer to the equipments label for the UL listing CSA Safety Refer to the equipment s label for CSA safety information Weight T1 NAM 1 Ib 2 oz 510 kg T1 I O Card 6 oz 170 kg Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 35 F to 122 F 1 7 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands
53. P1 26 TPot1 2 4 RPort2 27 29 TPort2 3 7 RPort3 28 32 TPort3 4 10 RPort4 29 35 TPor4 5 13 RPort5 30 38 TPor5 6 16 RPort 131 41 TPort6 7 19 RPort7 32 44 TPort7 8 22 R Ports 33 47 TPort8 9 P2 1 RPort1 34 P2 26 T Port 1 10 4 RPort2 35 29 TPort2 11 7 RPot3 36 32 TPort3 12 10 RPort4 37 35 TPor4 13 13 RPort5 38 38 TPort5 14 16 RPort6 39 41 TPor6 15 19 R Port7 40 44 TPort7 16 22 R Ports 41 47 TPort8 17 P3 1 RPort1 42 P3 26 TPort1 18 4 RPot2 43 29 TPort2 19 7 RPots 44 32 TPort3 20 10 RPot4 45 35 TPort4 21 13 RPots 46 38 TPor5 22 16 RPote 47 41 TPort6 23 19 RPot7 48 44 TPort7 24 22 RPot8 49 47 TPor8 25 x P 50 a April 1998 E 17 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments 3 Amphenol Plugs to 4 Amphenol Plugs Cable M66 Blocks Signal Ground X RX E amp M and Battery B Voice APMs e e o 97 1517202 E 18 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments 3 Amphenol Plugs to 4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P1 1 of 2 P1 Pin Designation Connects To Pin Designation Function 1 R Port 1 P4 1 R Port 1 Transmit Ring 2 R1 Port 1 P5 1 R
54. Protocol Options 2 of 3 Default Network Destination Possible Settings None COM FDL1 FDL2 DDL EDLss p Default Setting None Specifies where the default network is connected Default Network Destination is forced to None if Default Network Destination is set to FDL1 FDL2 or DDL and Network Interface is set to Disable on the Network Interface Options screen see Table 5 1 Management Link on the Network Interface Options screen is changed to a value inconsistent with the value of Network Interface Destination Default Network Destination is set to COM and COM Port Use is set to Terminal or Alarms on the Communication Port Options screen see Table 5 10 Default Network Destination is set to EDLss p and EDL Management Link is set to Disable on the Synchronous Data Port Options screen for Port p of Slot ss see Table 5 3 None No default network destination Data that cannot be routed is discarded COM The communication port is the default network destination This selection only appears if Port Use is set to Net Link on the Communication Port Options screen see Table 5 10 FDL1 The FDL is the default network destination on Network Interface 1 This selection only appears if Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface 1 Options screen see Table 5 1 FDL2 The FDL is the default network destination on Network Interface 2 This selection only appears if Management Link
55. RXD RD 104 3 A From DCE 4 A 16 B 11 B Request to Send RTS 105 4 A To DCE 3 A 19 B 10 B Signal Ground Common 102 7 8 Data Channel Received Line 109 8 A From DCE 5 A Signal Detector Receiver Ready 10 B 12 B RLSD RR Receiver Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE 6 A RXC DCE Source 9 B 13 B Transmitter Signal Element Timing 113 24 A To DCE 7 A Terminal Timing TT 11 B 14 B DTE Source April 1998 E 11 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Voice APM Cables This section provides the pin assignments for the FXO FXS and E amp M voice APM 50 pin Amphenol connectors RJ27X socket followed by the pin assignments for the extension cables that can be used with these APMs FXO FXS Voice APM Connector The FXO FXS Analog Voice APM uses a single 50 pin connector to provide eight 2 wire interfaces for connecting to analog voice equipment FXO FXS 50 Pin Amphenol Connector Port Pin Signal 1 26 T 1 R 2 29 T 4 R 3 32 T 7 R 4 35 T 10 R 5 38 T 13 R 6 41 T 16 R 7 44 T 19 R 8 47 T 22 R All other pins are unconnected E 12 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 E amp M Voice APM Connector Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments The E amp M Analog Voice APM uses a single 50 pin connector RJ27X socket to provide eight 2 wire interfaces for connecting to analog voice equipment E amp M 5
56. Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 4 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main status performance network cont d Telco 24 Hour Totals Valid Intervals ES UAS SES BES CSS LOFC User Current Current Interval Timer ESF Error Events ES UAS SES BES CSS LOFC Status User Intervals ES UAS SES BES CSS LOFC Status User 24 Hour Totals Valid Intervals ES UAS SES BES CSS LOFC User Clear Statistics For the network interface Read value in dsx1 ValidIntervals dsx1TotalES dsx1TotalUAS dsx1TotalSES dsx1TotalBES dsx1TotalCSS devTelcoTotalLOFC For the network interface Read value in devUserCurrentTimer devUserCurrentEvent devUserCurrentESs devUserCurrentUASs devUserCurrentSESs devUserCurrentBESs devUserCurrentCSSs devUserCurrentLOFC devUserCurrentStEvnt Select interval number with devUserlntervalNumber then Read value in devUserlntervalESs devUserlntervalUASs devUserlntervalSESs devUserlntervalBESs devUserlntervalCSSs devUserlntervalLOFC devUserlntervalStEvnt devUserValidintervals devUserTotalESs devUserTotalUASs devUserTotalSESs devUserTotalBESs devUserTotalCSSs devUserTotalLOFC For the network interface Set devClrUserReg to clear D 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 5 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP
57. SNMP Community Names and Access Levels 6 6 Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses 6 7 Greating aA LOGIN iit sing ae ca oe ee ie Pee eee E ee 6 8 Deleting s Legit ioco eased ahve Ran 4 tai iwke tte ie ewe adenk da 6 9 April 1998 iii Contents 7 Displaying System Information m Displaying System and NAM Identity Information issus 7 1 m Displaying APM Identity Information 00 cee eee ee eee 7 2 m Displaying System and Test Status 00 00 cece eee eee 7 2 m Displaying Voice APM Status cos codecs re reneis dirantan teias 7 3 m Displaying Cross Connect Status 0 0000 c cece eee eee 7 7 Displaying Network Channels 00 0c cece e eee eee 7 7 Displaying DSX 1 Channels 0 cc cece eee eee 7 9 Displaying Port Assignments 000 cee eee eee eee ee 7 11 Displaying Device Name and SNMP System Identitication Information eee d ekki ee ee ee 7 12 m Viewing Network and Sync Data Performance Statistics 7 12 What Statistics Can Be Collected 00 cece eee eens 7 12 Network Performance Statistics 0 0 e cence eee 7 13 Sync Data Performance Statistics 00 cece eee eee 7 13 Displaying Performance Statistics 0 cece eee eens 7 14 Selecting Performance Statistics Intervals for Display 7 14 Clearing Performance Statistics 0 0c cece eee eee 7 16 E Stats In
58. T1 access unit is operating at any speed other than the default 19 2 kbps and you attempt to load factory default configuration options you could lose your communication link p Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration 2 The Load Configuration From screen appears Select the configuration option area you want to load and press Return The selected configuration option set is loaded into the configuration edit area and the Configuration Edit Display screen appears 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 5 Setting Up Changing Configuration Options Once the Configuration is loaded use the Configuration Edit Display screen to display change and save a configuration in one of the configuration areas p Procedure 1 From the Configuration Edit Display screen select the configuration option set you want to view or make changes to and press Return 2 Select the configuration options applicable to your network and make appropriate changes to the setting s 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 until all changes are complete Saving Configuration Options When all changes to the configuration options are complete use the Save function key to save configuration option changes to either the Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 configuration areas p Procedure 1 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 2 Select the Save function key from any of the Configuration branch screens and press Return
59. Test Jacks Ceecee eje e NOW ZIAN NOW HAN LEDs 97 15647 9161 A2 GH30 30 Network and DSX Interface LEDs Troubleshooting Label Indication Color What It Means SIG Signal Green ON A recoverable signal is present on the Network DSX interface OFF The signal cannot be recovered from the Network DSX interface An LOS condition exists OOF Out of Frame Yellow ON Atleast one OOF was detected during the sampling period OFF No OOFs were detected during the sampling period ALM Alarm Yellow ON Analarm condition is present on the Network DSX interface Current alarm conditions Loss of Signal LOS Loss of Frame LOF Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow a Alarm Indication Signal AIS OFF No alarm condition is present on the Network DSX interface Port 1 and Port 2 LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means 1 OK Operational Green ON Theinterchange circuits for the port 2 OK Status are in the correct state to transmit and receive data OFF The port is idle Occurs if the port is disabled if an EDL Out of Frame or EER condition is present if a DCLB is active or if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted April 1998 9 3 Troubleshooting T1 NAM Test Jack Functions The T1 NAM has four sets of test jacks located on the upper section of the faceplate Four nonintrusive access p
60. The Save Configuration To screen appears 3 Select the configuration option area where you want to save the changes to and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen NOTE If you changed configuration options and try to exit the Configuration branch without saving those changes a Save Configuration screen appears requiring a Yes or No response to saving the changes If you select Then the No Main Menu screen appears Changes are not saved Yes Save Configuration To screen appears Choose a configuration option area to save to e g Customer Configuration 1 5 6 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Configuring T1 and DSX 1 Interfaces You can configure the following interfaces m Network Interface m DSX 1 Interface if applicable Configuring the Network Interface Use the Network Interface Options screen to configure the network interface on the T1 NAM see Table 5 1 Configuration Edit Display Network If you have a 9261 Dual T1 NAM select the desired Network interface 1 default or 2 in the NETWORK field For the 9161 Single T1 NAM this field is read only and always displays a 1 Table 5 1 Network Interface Options 1 of 7 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable for Network interface 1 Enable for Network interface 2 Specifies whether t
61. Use power supply Primary Clock Failure Alarm 5 51 Primary Clock Source port product related documents R recording configurations reference documents remote access units routing using routers Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback Remote Loopbacks Repeater Loopback resetting T1 access unit resetting the access unit COM port 4 8 8 14 restoring access to the user interface Return Enter key right arrow key Ring Back Tone FXS RJ27X socket E 13 RJ48C RLB routers routing to remote access units Routing on same subnet B 4 using different subnets B 5 using routers Routing Information Protocol RIP Rx Gain dB E amp M 5 25 FXO FXS al Z J April 1998 Index S saving configuration options screen area displays field types function keys function keys area navigating work ano d work areas switching aen E Secondary Clock Failure Alarm Secondary Clock Source 5 50 port security selecting a field from a menu IP addressing scheme management interface Self Test Results Messages Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready 5 19 Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure Send Pattern DSX 1 interface 9 27 Network interface Sync Data Port serial APM number serial number NAM Session ending starting Session Access Level set Communication Protocol options 5 67 date and time Management and Communication options 5 67 System Options 5 48 Use
62. User userDRSTone start Stop Send DRS to User userDRSTone stop Start Send Quiet to T1 networkQuietTone start Stop Send Quiet to T1 networkQuietTone stop Start Send Quiet to User userQuietTone start Stop Send Quiet to User userQuietTone stop main test port voice Set devVoiceTestType to With devVoiceTestAction set to Set Tx ABCD Bits testTXBits start and devVoiceTestArgument specifying the ABCD bit values Set Rx ABCD Bits testRXBits start and devVoiceTestArgument specifying the ABCD bit values Set Tip amp Ring Leads testTRLeads start and devVoiceTestArgument specifying Tip and Ring values Set E Lead State testELeads start and devVoiceTestArgument set to idle or active Read testTXBits testRXBits testT RLeads testELeads test RLeads 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 D 11 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 12 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main test port OCU Set devOcuTestType to With devOcuTestControl set to Start OCU LB locOCULB running Stop OCU LB locOCULB idle Start Non Latching CSU LB locNonLatchingCSULB running Stop Non Latching CSU LB locNonLatchingCSULB idle Start Latching CSU LB locLatchingCSULB running Stop Latching CSU LB locLatchingCSULB idle Start Non Latching DSU LB locNonLatchingDSULB running Stop Non Latching DSU LB locNonLatchingDSULB idle Start Latching DSU LB locLatchingDSULB running Stop Latching DSU LB locLatchingDSULB
63. Yellow Alarm None Halt Network Initiated Data Channel Loopback DCLB Disable V 54 FT1 Both Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Disable DTPLB DCLB Both Embedded Data Link Enable Disable EDL Management Link Enable Disable IP Address 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Routing Information Protocol None Proprietary Near End Performance Statistics Disable Maintain Send Both Far End Performance Statistics Disable Maintain Out of Frame OOF Alarm Enable Disable Excessive Error Rate EER Alarm Enable Disable Excessive Error Rate Threshold 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 1 The first byte cannot be set to 0 nor 127 However the null address of 0 0 0 0 is valid after performing a Clear April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Device Name Menus and Configuration Worksheets Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold E amp M Voice See Table 5 4 Slot ss 2 slot 02 5 slot 02 03 04 05 Port p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Port Status Enable Disable Operating Mode E amp M Transmit Only Rx Gain dB 17 0 16 5 16 0 15 5 15 0 0 0 6 5 47 0 47 5 Tx Attenuation dB 17 0 16 5 16 0 715 5 15 0 0 0 6 5 47 0 47 5 Tru
64. a System Options See Table 5 9 Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold Generate Yellow Alarm Signals Enable Disable Test Timeout Enable Disable Test Duration min 1 120 10 Primary Clock Source Net1 Net2 DSXss p Internal External Sync Data Port for Primary Clock Source SssPp the first available port Secondary Clock Source Net1 Net2 DSXss p Internal External Sync Data Port for Secondary Clock Source SssPp the first available port External Clock Rate KHz 8 1544 2048 Primary Clock Failure Alarm Enable Disable Secondary Clock Failure Alarm Enable Disable April 1998 A 11 Menus and Configuration Worksheets A 12 Device Name User Interface Settings Default in Bold Configuration Option Communication Port See Table 5 10 Port Use Terminal Net Link Alarm Port Type Asynchronous Synchronous RIP None Proprietary Port Type Synchronous Clock Source Internal External Data Rate Kbps 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Port Type Asynchronous Data Rate Kbps 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Character Length 7 8 Parity None Even Odd Stop Bits 1 1 5 2 Ignore Control Leads Disable DTR Login Required Enable Disable Port Access
65. all of the timing within the T1 access unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces Failure of the clock specified by this configuration option results in automatic fallback to the Secondary Clock Source configuration option setting Only one APM clock source can be selected for either primary or secondary clock NOTE For the Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Sync Data and Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The primary clock for the unit is derived from the Network 1 T1 interface Net2 The primary clock for the unit is derived from the Network 2 T1 interface DSXss p The primary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX T1 interface where ss is the slot number and p is the port number This selection is only available if a DSX 1 interface is enabled Internal The primary clock for the unit is the internal clock External The primary clock for the unit is the external clock XTXC provided through one of the synchronous data ports specified in the Port options Only a disabled port can be selected and the port cannot be used for data This selection only appears if at least one synchronous data port is disabled Sync Data The primary clock for the unit is derived from the XTXC signal of a synchronous data port specified in the Port con
66. and Intended Audience 22 2005 ix m Document SUMMA ssc ieee rhy nb RR pEER IE ERES Rer SERES ix m Conventions Used ccc ccc e kE EENEN E na X m Product Related Documents 0e cece eee e tenes xi m Reference Documents 020 c eee e cece eee eee eens xii 1 Aboutthe T1 Access Mux OUT AC en 1 1 COMPONEN S EIE 1 2 PO AUUINOS uuu seo be eed n eed iei te a e he 1 6 2 Management and Control 3 Applications 9161 A2 GH30 30 OVERVIOW teva base Sanna tanh ow dane ah ee Handa eterna eie E e edicta 2 1 Configuring Local Management Control 00 cece cece nee 2 1 Creating a Management Link Through the COM Port 2 2 Configuring an External Device Connected to the COM Port 2 3 Configuring End to End Management Control 0 00e seen 2 4 Management Control Using the ESF FDL 2 4 Management Control Using an EDL 000 cece eee 2 5 VONIN sori srr acorn de tied ere eUERC IA EEREN eR REEF dudes 3 1 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data seseluluusss 3 2 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and E amp M LLuuuue 3 3 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and APL 3 4 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data FXS and E amp M 3 5 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and Drop amp Insert 3 6 Channel Bank Replacement and Additio
67. command save No action needed clear abort completed normally Connection Refused User interface is in use This Wait and try again will only appear during initiation of a Telnet session 7 16 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Table 7 1 System Status Messages 2 of 2 Displaying System Information Message What It Indicates What To Do Please Wait Command takes longer than 5 seconds 1 Wait until message clears 2 If the message does not clear within 2 minutes reset the device User Interface Already in Use Access to the user interface via Telnet is in use access to the interface is denied IP address and login of the user currently accessing the interface are also provided 1 Wait and try again 2 Contact IP address user and request that they log off User Interface Idle Previously active session is now closed ended and access via the COM port is now available Log onto the access unit Session has ended due to timeout Normal condition no action needed System Health and Test Status Messages The System and Test Status screen Path main status system test status displays the following types of messages m Health and Status Displays Health and status information in priority order highest to lowest m Self Test Results Displays the results of the power up self test diagnostics m TestStatus Indicates w
68. connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an E amp M interface ABCD 1111 E amp M busy FXOg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXSg idle FXOg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSg busy FXOI idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSI idle FXOl busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXO Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXSI busy FXSg idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOg idle FXSg busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Ground Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOg busy FXSI idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 0101 FXOl idle FXSI busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross c
69. data ensures that the ones density requirements for the network are met Enable Inverts the transmitted and received data for the port Disable Does not invert the transmitted and received data for the port 5 18 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 3 Synchronous Data Port Options 3 of 7 Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready Possible Settings Disable DTR RTS Both Default Setting Both Specifies the conditions on the synchronous data port that determine when valid data is not being sent from the DTE When this condition is detected all ones are sent to the network on the DSO channels allocated to the port Disable Interchange circuits from the DTE are not monitored Data sent from the DTE is always sent to the network for the port DTR Monitors DTE Ready DTR to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE When DTR is off all ones are sent to the network DTR does not appear if Port Type is set to X 21 RTS Monitors Request to Send RTS to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE When RTS is off all ones are sent to the network Both Monitors both DTR and RTS to determine when valid data is sent from the DTE If either DTR or RTS is off all ones are sent to the network Both does not appear if Port Type is set to X 21 Action on Network Yellow Alarm Possible Settings None Halt Default Setting Halt Specifies the action to take on the sy
70. idle Start OCU Line LB locLineLB running Stop OCU Line LB locLineLB idle Start OCU Data LB locDataLB running Stop OCU Data LB locDataLB idle Start OCU DS 0 LB locDSOLB running Stop OCU DS 0 LB locDSOLB idle Start remote Latching CSU LB remLatchingCSULB running Stop remote Latching CSU LB remLatchingCSULB idle Start remote Latching DSU LB remLatchingDSULB running Stop remote Latching DSU LB remLatchingDSULB idle Start remote Latching OCU LB remLatchingOCULB running Stop remote Latching OCU LB remLatchingOCULB idle Start remote Non Latching CSU LB remNonLatchingCSULB running Stop remote Non Latching CSU LB remNonLatchingCSULB idle Start remote Non Latching DSU LB remNonLatchingDSULB running Stop remote Non Latching DSU LB remNonLatchingDSULB idle Start remote Non Latching OCU LB remNonLatchingOCULB running Stop remote Non Latching OCU LB remNonLatchingOCULB idle Start Send All Zeros to User sendZerosUser running Stop Send All Zeros to User sendZerosUser idle Start Send All Ones to User sendOnesUser running Stop Send All Ones to User sendOnesUser idle Start Send 63 to User send63User running Stop Send 63 to User send63User idle April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 13 of 16 SNMP Cross Reference Inject Error Clear Monitor Error Number of Errors Monitored Number of Errors Injected Set devOcuSendControllnjectErr to inject User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main
71. interface to data terminal equipment A subrate DSU CSU is normally referred to as a DSU Digital Signal Cross Connect level 1 An interconnection point for terminals multiplexers and transmission facilities Digital Signal level 0 zero A 64 kbps digital telecommunications signal or channel April 1998 GL 1 Glossary DS1 DTE DTMF D4 EER EON ES ESD ESF FCC FDL FXO FXODN FXS FXSDN ICMP IP ITU LBO LCD LED LLB GL 2 Digital Signal level 1 one A digital signal transmitted at the rate of 1 544 Mbps in North America Data Terminal Equipment The equipment such as a computer or terminal that provides data in the form of digital signals for transmission Dual Tone Multifrequency The basis of operation for a pushbutton telephone The transmission standard that specifies 12 frames as a superframe that is used for frame synchronization and to locate signaling bits Excessive Error Rate An error rate that is greater than the threshold that has been configured in the device End of Number Errored second A second with one or more ESF error events one or more CRC6 error events or OOFs ElectroStatic discharge An undesirable discharge of static electricity that can damage equipment and degrade electrical circuitry Extended Superframe The T1 transmission standard that specifies 24 frames as an extended superframe to be used for frame synchronization and to locate signal
72. is detected on the interface Disable Alarms are not generated for a Loss of Signal condition Abnormal Station Code Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when an Abnormal Station code is received from the network Abnormal Station Code Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Enable An alarm is generated when an Abnormal Station Code is received from the network Disable Alarms are not generated when an Abnormal Station Code is received 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 33 Setting Up Table 5 7 OCU DP Options Slot ss Port p Options 3 of 3 64KCC Loop OOF Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when a 64KCC Loop Out of Frame OOF condition is detected A 64KCC Loop Out of Frame OOF Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Enable An alarm is generated when a 64KCC Loop Out of Frame condition is detected on the interface Disable Alarms are not generated for a 64KCC Loop Out of Frame condition DDS Network Failure Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when a DDS Network Failure code is received from the network DDS Network Failure Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Enable
73. is set to FDL on the Network Interface 2 Options screen see Table 5 1 DDL The DDL is the default network destination This selection only appears if Management Link is set to DDL on the Network Interface Options screen see Table 5 1 EDLss p The EDL ss p port where ss is the slot number of the NAM or the synchronous data APM belonging to the ports and p is the number of the port This selection only appears if EDL Management Link is set to Enable on the Synchronous Data Port Options screen see Table 5 3 for port p of slot ss Communication Port IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the unit when the COM port is configured as a network communication link The IP address is only in effect when the Communication Port Use configuration option is set to Net Link see Table 5 10 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the communication port IP address which you can view or edit The first digit i e xxx 255 255 255 cannot be 0 or 127 or greater than 223 However 000 is valid representing a null address Clear Clears the IP address for the communication port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 14 Communication Protocol Options 3 of 3 Communication Port Subnet Mask Possible Settings
74. listed in alphabetical order within each table Trap warmStart Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause warmStart T1 access unit has just reinitialized and stabilized itself Reset command sent Power disruption 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 C 1 SNMP Traps Trap authentificationFailure Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause authenticationFailure Access to the T1 access unit was attempted and failed SNMP protocol message not properly authenticated Three unsuccessful attempts were made to enter a correct login password combination IP address security is enabled and a message was received from SNMP Manager whose address was not on the list of approved managers Traps linkUp and linkDown C 2 Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause link Down The link is down A failure in one of the communication interfaces has occurred linkUp The link is operational One of the failed communication interfaces is up and operational The interfaces that support these traps and conditions that define linkUp and linkDown for each interface Interface linkUp Down Variable Bindings Possible Cause PHYSICAL SUBLAYER Represented by the entry in the MIB II Interfaces Table Network and DSX 1 interfaces Supported by the DS1 MIB m iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 m ifOperStatus RFC
75. ms increments The settings are numbers between 1 and 99 representing such increments The default is 15 for a wink delay of 150 ms 5 30 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 6 FXS Voice Slot ss Port p Options 3 of 4 Wink Duration 10 ms Possible Settings 1 99 Default Setting 20 Determines the duration of the wink signal generated towards the network when an off hook signal for the CO is detected and after the wink delay has elapsed in increments of 10 milliseconds Wink Duration only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Operating Mode is set to FXSDN WINK 10 to 990 ms The valid range is from 10 to 990 ms in 10 ms increments The settings are numbers between 1 and 99 representing such increments The default is 20 for a wink duration of 200 ms Rx Gain dB Possible Settings 10 00 9 5 9 0 8 5 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 42 0 Default Setting 0 0 Determines the receive path analog signal amplification or gain on the FXS voice port in decibels This is the gain increased signal level or attenuation decreased signal level applied to the signal Rx Gain dB only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 10 00 to 2 0 Increases or decreases the signal level The more positive the number the greater the signal level Tx Attenuation dB Possible Settings 10 00 9 5 9 0 8 5 0 0 44 0 4 5 45 0
76. normal shipping and handling Power Consumption 9 4 watts 0 78 amps input current at 12 volts Network 1 2 T1 Interface Physical Interface USA Physical Interface Canada Framing Format Coding Format Line Build Out LBO ANSI PRM Bit Stuffing Yellow Alarm Generation RJ48C CA81A using adapter cable D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 0 0 dB 7 5 dB 15 dB 22 5 dB Selectable FCC Part 68 AT amp T TR 62411 Selectable April 1998 F 1 Technical Specifications F 2 Specification Criteria DSX 1 Interface 9161 only Physical Interface Framing Format Coding Format DTE Line Equalization Send AIS DB15 socket D4 ESF AMI B8ZS 5 selectable ranges from 0 to 655 feet 0 to 196 5 meters Selectable DTE Ports Interfaces Standards Rates EIA 530A V 35 RS 449 V 11 X 21 Nx64 64K to 1 536 Mb Nx56 56K to 1 344 Mb COM Port Interface Data Rates 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 and 115 2 kbps 57 6 and 115 2 kbps are recommended for FTP download only DBM Backup connector reserved for future use One 8 position modular keyed USOC RJ45 jack Clocking Sources T1 network interface 1 or 2 any port internal clock DSX 1 T1 interface 9161 only or external clock Loopbacks Standard Additional For 9161 Only Network Line Loopback Network Payload Loopback V 54 Loop 2 DCLB and V 54 Loop 3 DTPLB Network Repeater Loop
77. port settings 1 4 8 Attach the async terminal to the COM port 2 At the async terminal configure the terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity Ensure that any hardware or software flow control is disabled Reset the T1 access unit then immediately and repeatedly press Return at a rate of at least 1 press per second until the System Paused screen appears Tab to the desired method and enter yes or y for the selected prompt April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 User Interface If entering yes to prompt Then Reset COM Port usage Port Type is set to Terminal Data Rate Kbps is set to 19 2 Character Length is set to 8 Stop Bits is set to 1 Parity is set to None External Device Commands is set to Disable Reload Factory Defaults All factory loaded configuration and control settings contained in the Default Factory configuration area are loaded If no or n is entered or if no selection is made within 30 seconds the T1 access unit returns to the condition of operation it was in when the system pause was initiated with the COM port settings returning to their configured states If you chose yes the T1 access unit resets itself going through a Device Self Test Connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears April 1998 4 9 User Interface 4 10 April 1998
78. reinstall the APM 3 Contact your service representative OOF EDL Slot ss Port p An Out of Frame OOF condition is detected for the identified slot and port This condition occurs when any two of five consecutive frame synchronizing bits received from the remote unit are incorrect This condition clears when a reframe occurs 1 Cabling problem 2 T1 facility problem 1 Check that the far end is configured for EDL 2 Contact your network provider EER Slot ss Port p An Excessive Error Rate EER condition is detected for the identified slot and port 1 Contact network provider Loss of Signal Slot ss Port p A Loss of Signal LOS condition has been detected on the identified OCU DP interface An LOS is declared when a signal has been absent on the local loop for more than two consecutive seconds 1 Check that the DSU is powered up 2 Check the cable Abnormal Station Code Slot ss Port p An Abnormal Station Code is being received from the network DSO for the identified OCU DP interface This condition indicates that the far end DSU is disconnected or powered off 1 Check the that the far end DSU is operational 2 Check the cable to the far end DSU ss represents physical slots April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Table 7 2 Health and Status Messages 4 of 5 Displaying System Information Message What It Indicates What To Do
79. required see Creating a Login in Chapter 6 Security you are prompted to enter them here The FTP prompt appears 3 The starting directory is the root directory The following are available in the system directory nam1 ctl ocd nam2 low ocd nam3 hi ocd current cfg factory cfg cust1 cfg cust2 cfg Use the standard FTP commands during the FTP session as well as the following remote FTP commands Command Definition cd directory Change the current directory on the access unit to directory dir directory or Print a listing of the directory contents in the directory directory Is 1 If no directory is specified the current one is used get file1 file2 Copy a file from the remote directory of the T1 access unit node to the local directory on the host remotehelp Print the meaning of the command If no argument is given a command list of all known commands is printed Is directory Print an abbreviated list of the directory contents in the specified directory If no directory is specified the current one is used put file1 file2 Copy file from a local directory on the host to file 2in the current directory of the T1 access unit recy file1 file 2 Same as a get send file file 2 Same as a put pwd Print the name of the current directory of the T1 access unit Performing an Upgrade If you need to upgrade the NAM program code you must transfer the following files in
80. screen 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 3 Setting Up Setting Date and Time Use the Date amp Time screen to set the date and time for the system p Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Control Date amp Time 2 Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the field where you want to add or change information NOTE To clear existing information move the cursor to the Clear field and press Return Iftheselectionis Enter the Date mm dd yy Date in the format mm dd yy or mm dd yy Time hh mm Time 24 hour clock in the format hh mm 3 To save changes select Save and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen Configuring the T1 Access Unit Your system comes preconfigured with factory default settings as noted in the configuration option tables in this chapter as well as on the Quick Reference If you need to display or change these settings use the system s Configuration branch To change configuration option settings you must perform the following tasks m Access and display configuration option settings m Change configuration option settings m Save configurations option settings to a configuration option area NOTE Only Security Access Level 1 users can change configuration options Security Access Level 2 and 3 users can just view configuration options 5 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Se
81. sequence to display the Tests screen Main Menu Test Network Tests DSX 1 Tests For Network tests select the desired Network interface 1 for 9161 Single T1 NAM 1 or 2 for 9261 Dual T1 NAM For DSX 1 tests enter the slot and port number of the desired DSX 1 interface Select the desired pattern in the Send field If you are sending monitoring a user defined pattern enter the desired 2 byte hexadecimal value in the field next to Send When sending a pattern the Inject ERR function key appears Use Inject ERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern Highlight Send under Command in the row to send a pattern or Start to monitor a pattern Then press Return to start the test View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column An error count is also displayed When monitoring a pattern the ResetMon virtual function key appears ResetMon resets the error count to zero Highlight Stop under Command in the Send or Monitor row Then press Return to stop the test View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column The following tests cannot be running when a Send Pattern test is initiated 9161 A2 GH30 30 All loopbacks on the same interface Send Pattern Test on the same interface or any data port assigned to that interface Send Remote Line Loopback on the same interface Send V 54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any data port assigned to this i
82. test port OCU continued Set devOcuTestType to With devOcuTestControl set to continued Start Send 511 to User send511User running Stop Send 511 to User send511User idle Start Send 2047 to User send2047User running Stop Send 2047 to User send2047User idle Start Send All Zeros to User sendZerosT1 running Stop Send All Zeros to User sendZerosT1 idle Start Send All Ones to T1 sendOnesT1 running Stop Send All Ones to T1 sendOnesT1 idle Start Send 63 to T1 send63T1 running Stop Send 63 to T1 send63T1 idle Start Send 511 to T1 send511T1 running Stop Send 511 to User send511User idle Start Send 2047 to T1 send2047T1 running Stop Send 2047 to T1 send2047T1 idle Set devOcuMonResultErrorCount Read value from devOcuMonResultErrorCount Read value from devOcuSendControlErrorCount 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 14 of 16 main config save User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object CONFIG main config load followed by Set devConfigAreaCopy to the selected area active to customer1 factory1 to active etc main config Accept Configuration Mismatch Set devCfgCardAction to accept main config network Network Interface Line Framing Format Line Coding Format ANSI Performance Report Msgs Management Link DDL Rate Network Time Slot Circuit Identifier Set Read ifAdminStatus to up or down dsxiLineType dsx1Line
83. the DSX1 interface Z 9 DSX1 MON OUT A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the received Z DSX1 Monitor Out signal coming out of the network a composite of all channels 2 allocated to the DSX1 interface e O g DSX2 IN An intrusive test jack that allows insertion of a signal toward the equipment attached to the DSX2 interface by external test equipment DSX2 OUT An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from the equipment attached to the DSX2 interface by external test equipment DSX2 MON IN A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal going DSX2 Monitor In into the equipment attached to the DSX2 interface DSX2 MON OUT A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal DSX2 Monitor Out coming out of the equipment attached to the DSX2 interface 97 15644 01 See Test Jacks on page 9 8 for more information on the test jacks 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 9 7 Troubleshooting Test Jacks 9 8 And provides these test access This card Provides these test jacks points 9161 Single T1 Network In Network Monitor In POM Network Out Network Monitor Out m DSX In DSX Monitor In a DSX Out DSX Monitor Out 9261 Dual T1 Network 1 In Network 1 Monitor In TUAM Network 1 Out Network 1 Monitor Out Network 2 In Network 2 Monitor In Network 2 Out Network 2 Monitor Out 9109 Dual DSX a DSX 1 In DSX 1 Monitor In nd DSX 1 Out DSX 1 Monitor Ou
84. the MIB RFCs Read Write Read and write access to the objects in the MIB for the T1 access unit Allows write access for all objects specified as read write in the MIB RFCs However access for all read only objects is specified as read only 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 73 Setting Up Setting Up for SNMP Traps 5 74 Use the SNMP Traps Options see Table 5 17 to specify the information needed to support SNMP traps Use the SNMP Trap Options screen to configure the necessary configuration options needed to support the SNMP traps Configuration Edit Display gt Management and Communication SNMP Traps To configure the T1 access unit for SNMP traps you must set m The number of SNMP managers that are to receive SNMP traps from the T1 access unit m An IP address for each SNMP manager specified m Thetype of SNMP traps to be sent from the T1 access unit NOTE Be sure to choose an operational link for the default Should the default link become disabled unrouteable traps will be discarded To Set the configuration option Enable sending of SNMP trap messages SNMP Traps to Enable Specify the number of SNMP managers that will receive SNMP trap messages from the T1 access unit Number of SNMP Managers to the desired number maximum of 6 of SNMP managers to receive SNMP traps Specify an IP address for each SNMP manager specified in the Number of SNMP Managers configur
85. to ensure that all of the data is correct up to the point where it is sent out over the interface m This helps to indicate that the T1 access unit is operational m An attached device or test equipment should generate and monitor data to be looped back Network AIS Interface DCE DCE Port2 Port 1 496 15199 The T1 NAM will not respond to any messages from the network during this test The following tests cannot be running when a repeater loopback test is initiated m Payload Loopback on this Network or DSX 1 interface m All loopbacks on any other T1 interface DSX 1 or Network with DSOs assigned to this interface m Send Pattern Test on this Network or DSX 1 interface or any data port assigned to this interface m Send Remote Line Loopback on this Network or DSX 1 interface m Send V 54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any data port assigned to this Network or DSX 1 interface m Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to this Network or DSX 1 interface CAUTION Repeater Loopback may affect the operation of the FDL DDL or EDL Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted Also any performance statistics being sent over the EDL will be disrupted 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 9 25 Troubleshooting Remote Loopbacks The remote loopback up codes which put a remote device in loopback mode and down codes which take a remote device out of loopback mode are in band codes that all
86. trunks Helps to prevent glaring i e call collision This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS FXSDN or FXSDN WINK Ground Start Immediate Enables the signaling used for fast response time to the PBX or station This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS Ground Start Automatic Enables the signaling used for fast response time to the central office This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS d3 The APM meets the pre 1988 specifications for PLAR circuits This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to PLAR d4 The APM meets the post 1988 specifications for PLAR circuits This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to PLAR Terminating Impedance ohms Possible Settings 600 900 Default Setting 600 Determines the terminating impedance in ohms for the port Terminating Impedance only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 600 The terminating impedance is 600 ohms 900 The terminating impedance is 900 ohms Wink Delay 10 ms Possible Settings 1 99 Default Setting 15 Determines the amount of delay before the wink signal is generated towards the network and when an off hook signal from the CO is detected in increments of 10 milliseconds Wink Delay only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Operating Mode is set to FXSDN WINK 10 to 990 The valid range is from 10 to 990 ms in 10
87. un COM Port Cable 25 D to 8 mod 3100 F2 540 035 0314 1431 s COM Port Cable 9 DSUB to 8 mod 3100 F2 550 035 0313 1431 LAN COM Port Cable 8 mod to 8 mod 3100 F2 910 035 0315 1431 Voice Cable Amphenol plug Amphenol plug 9008 F1 531 035 0320 0531 25 pairs 6 ft Voice Cable Amphenol socket Amphenol 9008 F1 532 035 0321 2531 plug 25 pairs 25 ft Voice Connector 3 Amphenol plug 4 9008 F1 533 035 0318 0631 Amphenol plug 6 ft Voice Connector 3 Amphenol plug 1 9008 F1 534 035 0319 0631 Amphenol plug 6 ft M66 Block with 2 socket 50 pin connectors 9008 F1 535 m Modem Cable 8 pin RJ45 to DB25 plug 9008 F1 550 035 0336 1431 RJ48S DDS Network Cable 14 ft 3600 F3 501 035 0267 1431 RJ48S DDS Cable 25 ft 3600 F3 502 035 0267 2531 T1 Mass Termination Cable 50 pin plug to 9007 F1 500 035 0363 0531 seven RJ48S plug 5 ft April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Glossary AIS AMI APM AWG BES BPV B8ZS COM port configuration option CRC CSS CSU DCE DID DPO DPT DSU DSX 1 DSO 9161 A2 GH30 30 Alarm Indication Signal An all ones signal transmitted to maintain transmission continuity and to indicate to the receiving terminal that a transmission fault exists at either the transmitting terminal or upstream of the transmitting signal Sometimes referred to as Blue Alarm Alternate Mark Inversion A line coding technique used to accommodate the ones density requirements of E1 or T1 lines
88. user s analog equipment Positive TX Attenuation settings reduce the level of the encoded analog signals sent towards the telephone network and negative settings introduce gain When connecting permissive mode modems and fax machines a setting of 3 dB should result in a compliant encoded analog of less than 12 dBm The proper setting of this strap is crucial to ensuring compliance with Part 68 FCC Rules and Industry Canada s CS 03 Specification Tx Attenuation dB only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 10 00 to 5 0 Increases or decreases the signal level The more negative the number the greater the signal level opposite of Rx Gain settings Trunk Cond in CGA Possible Settings Busy Idle Default Setting Busy Determines the trunk condition or state that the port is forced into as a result of the Carrier Group Alarm CGA Trunk Cond in CGA only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Busy Forces the port to Busy during the Carrier Group Alarm Idle Forces the port to Idle during the Carrier Group Alarm 5 28 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up For FXS Voice Ports Table 5 6 FXS Voice Slot ss Port p Options 1 of 4 Port Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the FXS voice port is in use and can be configured and assigned to a time slot on the T1 or DSX 1 interface in order to transmit
89. using an acceptable method of connection The customer should be aware that compliance with the above conditions may not prevent degradation of service in some situations Repairs to certified equipment should be coordinated by a representative designated by the supplier Any repairs or alterations made by the user to this equipment or equipment malfunctions may give the telecommunications company cause to request to disconnect the equipment Users should ensure for their own protection that the electrical ground connections of the power utility telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe system if present are connected together This precaution may be particularly important in rural areas CAUTION Users should not attempt to make such connections themselves but should contact the appropriate electric inspection authority or electrician as appropriate The Ringer Equivalence Number REN assigned to each terminal device provides an indication of the maximum number of terminals allowed to be connected to a telephone interface The termination on an interface may consist of any combination of devices subject only to the requirement that the sum of the Ringer Equivalence Numbers of all the devices does not exceed 5 If your equipment is in need of repair refer to the procedures described in the Warranty Sales and Service Information section on page A E July 1998 9161 A2 GH30 31 Contents About This Guide m Document Purpose
90. 0 April 1998 D 5 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 6 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main status performance port cont d Far End 8 Hour Totals Valid Intervals ES UAS SES BES LOFC Complete Far End Clear Statistics For the port Read value in devEDLFarEndTotalValidIntervals devEDLFarEndTotalESs devEDLFarEndTotalUASs devEDLFarEndTotalSESs devEDLFarEndTotalBESs devEDLFarEndTotalLOFC devEDLFarEndTotalCmpl For the port Set devEDLCIrRegWhichRegs to farRegisters and devEDLCIrRegAction to clear Network All Synchronous Data Ports main status performance clear statistics Set devUserCIrReg Set devEDLCIrRegWhichRegs to nearRegisters and farRegisters and devEDLCIrRegsAction to clear main status identity Serial Number Model Number Software Revision Hardware Revision System Name System Contact System Location APM Type Read sysDescr object from the System group sysDescr object from the System group sysDescr object from the System group sysDescr object from the System group sysName object from the System group sysContact object from the System group sysLocation object from the System group ifDescr object for the interface D 6 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 7 of 16 Start Line Loopback Stop Line Loop
91. 0 Pin Amphenol Connector 1 of 2 Port Pin Function Signal 1 26 Transmit tip T 1 Transmit ring R 27 Receive tip T1 2 Receive ring R1 28 E Lead 3 M Lead M 2 29 Transmit tip 4 Transmit ring 30 Receive tip T1 5 Receive ring R1 31 E Lead E 6 M Lead M 3 32 Transmit tip 7 Transmit ring 33 Receive tip T1 8 Receive ring R1 34 E Lead E 9 M Lead M 4 35 Transmit tip 10 Transmit ring 36 Receive tip T1 11 Receive ring R1 37 E Lead E 12 M Lead M 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 E 13 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments E amp M 50 Pin Amphenol Connector 2 of 2 Port Pin Function Signal 5 38 Transmit tip T 13 Transmit ring R 39 Receive tip T1 14 Receive ring R1 40 E Lead 15 M Lead M 6 41 Transmit tip 16 Transmit ring 42 Receive tip T1 17 Receive ring R1 43 E Lead 18 M Lead M 7 44 Transmit tip 19 Transmit ring 45 Receive tip T1 20 Receive ring R1 46 E Lead 21 M Lead M 8 47 Transmit tip 22 Transmit ring 48 Receive tip T1 23 Receive ring R1 49 E Lead 24 M Lead M All 25 Signal Ground SG 50 Signal Battery SB E 14 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Extension Cables 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Extension cables can be ordered for use with the 50 pin FXO FXS and E amp M Voice APM c
92. 1 Port Receive Ring 3 M Port 1 P6 1 M Port 1 M Lead 4 R Port 2 P4 2 R Port 2 Transmit Ring 5 R1 Port 2 P5 2 R1 Port 2 Receive Ring 6 M1 Port 2 P6 2 M Port 2 M Lead 7 R Port 3 P4 3 R Port 3 Transmit Ring 8 R1 Port 3 P5 3 R1 Port 3 Receive Ring 9 M Port 3 P6 3 M Port 3 M Lead 10 R Port 4 P4 4 R Port 4 Transmit Ring 11 R1 Port 4 P5 4 R1 Port 4 Receive Ring 12 M Port 4 P6 4 M Port 4 M Lead 13 R Port 5 P4 5 R Port 5 Transmit Ring 14 R1 Port 5 P5 5 R1 Port 5 Receive Ring 15 M Port 5 P6 5 M Port 5 M Lead 16 R Port 6 P4 6 R Port 6 Transmit Ring 17 R1 Port 6 P5 6 R1 Port 6 Receive Ring 18 M Port 6 P6 6 M Port 6 M Lead 19 R Port 7 P4 7 R Port 7 Transmit Ring 20 R1 Port 7 P5 7 R1 Port 7 Receive Ring 21 M Port 7 P6 7 M Port 7 M Lead 22 R Port 8 P4 8 R Port 8 Transmit Ring 23 R1 Port 8 P5 8 R1 Port 8 Receive Ring 24 M Port 8 P6 8 M Port 8 M Lead 25 SG P7 1 8 SG Signal Ground Ports 1 8 Ports 1 8 April 1998 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments 3 Amphenol Plugs to 4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P1 2 of 2 P1 Pin Designation Connects To Pin Designation Function 26 T Port 1 P4 26 T Port 1 Transmit Tip 27 T1 Port 1 P5 26 T1 Port 1 Receive Tip 28 E Port 1 P6 26 E Port 1 E Lead 29 T Port 2 P4 27 T Port 2 Tran
93. 1 Access Units B and C share a subnet 135 18 3 0 m T1 Access Units A and B share a different subnet 135 18 2 0 m T1 Access Units A and D share yet another subnet 135 18 4 0 Subnet 135 18 40 0 SNMP NMS Subnet 135 18 2 0 135 18 2 2 B Ethernet 135 18 40 1 LAN Adapter COM Port IP Address 135 18 40 3 Sas 1 135 18 4 1 1 135 18 4 26 Subnet 135 18 4 0 J Physical Connection EDL Management Link This subnet connection can be to any of the following SNMP NMS via the COM Port LAN adapter via the COM Port Terminal server via the COM Port 496 15187 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 B 5 IP Addressing Routing to Remote T1 Access Units Using Routers In the following example each T1 access unit receives its management traffic through a connection from the COM port to the serial port of a router In this case the units do not route data among themselves but rely on the IP routers to route management traffic for the remote T1 access units using data streams configured between the routers Each T1 Access Unit is configured to be on its own subnet having a subnet mask of FF FF FF 00 This subnet is independent of the subnet on the LAN supported by the local router Subnet 135 18 1 0 SNMP NMS Subnet 135 18 5 0 135 18 5 2 L Router 135 18 1 1 Router 135 18 2 oe 135 18 4 1 Sub
94. 2 GH30 30 Security Limiting Access The T1 access unit provides several methods of security by limiting user access through the following user interfaces m Async Terminal Interface m Telnet m External Devices m SNMP Limiting Async Terminal Direct Access The access unit provides the following methods for limiting async terminal direct access on the communication COM port m Disabling the async terminal direct connection m Requiring a user login ID and password m Assigning an access level to the port The Communication Port Options screen provides the configuration options to limit async terminal access on the COM port 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 6 1 Security gt Procedure To limit COM port async terminal access 1 5 6 7 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 Follow this menu selection sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display User Interface Communication Port The Communication Port Options screen appears Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable an async terminal interface Port Use to Alarms direct connection Require a user s login ID and Login Required to Enable Pass wor
95. 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Chapter 9 9161 A2 GH30 30 Description About the T1 Access Mux Provides an overview of the components and features of the T1 access unit Management and Control Contains the steps you need to provide management connectivity to the T1 access unit Applications Shows some typical T1 access unit applications User Interface Describes the async terminal interface Setting Up Describes how to configure the T1 access unit for operation in your network Security Describes how to administer security including log in procedures and limiting user interface telnet and SNMP access Displaying System Information Describes how to display information about your system Operation and Maintenance Provides information for startup and monitoring dialing out to send SNMP traps maintaining call directories hot swapping APMs downloading upgrading and resetting the T1 access unit Troubleshooting Explains troubleshooting and test procedures of the T1 access unit April 1998 ix About This Guide Section Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C Appendix D Appendix E Appendix F Appendix G Glossary Index Conventions Used Description Menus and Configuration Worksheets Contains a graphical representation of the system configuration options and worksheets for you to record your selections IP Addressing Provides guidelines for selecting an IP addressing scheme SNMP Trap
96. 7 However the null address of 0 0 0 is valid after performing a Clear 3 Only shown when 9261 Dual T1 NAM is being used A 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Device Name Menus and Configuration Worksheets Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold Slot ss 916x 01 9262 02 9265 02 03 04 05 Port p 916x 1 926x 1 2 Interface Status Enable Disable Line Framing Format D4 ESF Line Coding Format AMI B8ZS Line Equalization 0 133 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure Enable Disable Loss of Signal LOS Alarm Enable Disable Out of Frame OOF Alarm Enable Disable Alarm Indication Signal AIS Enable Disable Yellow Alarm Enable Disable April 1998 A 5 Menus and Configuration Worksheets A 6 Device Name BEC Ue apie Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold Slot ss 916x 01 9x62 01 02 9x65 01 02 03 04 05 Port p T1 NAM 1 2 Sync Data APM 1 2 3 4 Port Status Enable Disable Port Type E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Port Base Rate Nx64 Nx56 Transmit Clock Source Internal External Invert Transmit Clock Enable Disable Invert Transmit and Received Data Enable Disable Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready Disable DTR RTS Both Action on Network
97. 9 38 OCU DP APM Off Premises Extension OPX Operating Mode operation Out of Frame OOF 5 22 Out of Frame OOF Alarm 9161 A2 GH30 30 P Parity 5 54 Passed status 7 23 Password Matching Error pattern tests available Payload Loopback Performance Statistics Far End ML pin assignments 3 Amph plugs to 1 Amph plug cable 3 Amph plugs to 4 Amph plugs cable COM port to PC or terminal printer cable COM port to modem cable COM port to PC cable COM port to terminal printer cable DSX 1 Port cable E amp M voice APM connector E 13 EIA530A to RS449 DTE adapter cable EIA 530 A to V 35 DTE adapter cable EIA 530A to X 21 DTE adapter cable EIA 232E port connector interface EIA 530A port 1 or 2 interface E 6 FXO FXS voice APM connector FXS voice APM connector LAN adapter LAN adapter to COM port cable OCU port RJ48S DDS network RJ48S network T1 mass termination cable E 26 T1 network cable T1 Network Interface Connector T1 RJ48S network PLB 9 24 Please Wait port assignment clearing 5 47 communication setting up 5 52 configure 5 16 copying configurations 5 35 OCU DP configure sync data configure voice configure 9161 A2 GH30 30 Index Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Port Access Level port assignments Port Base Rate 5 17 Port Rate OCU DP Port Status ER FXO FXS Sync Data Ports Port Type Port
98. 96 15212 Port 2 Port 1 The following tests cannot be running when a DCLB test is initiated m A Line Loopback Payload Repeater Loopback or Send Pattern Test on the same interface m Send Pattern Test or DTE Payload Loopback on the same port V 54 Remote Loopback The V 54 remote loopback commands a device to go into the data channel loopback on the associated port p Procedure To send a V 54 Remote Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test gt Sync Data Port Tests 2 Enter the desired slot and port number 3 Select the code Up or Down in the Send V 54 Loopback field 4 Highlight Send under Command in the Send V 54 Loopback row Then press Return to start the test The code will be sent for up to 10 seconds or until an acknowledgement is received from the remote end 5 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column 6 Send the Down code to stop the remote loopback 9 30 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting The following tests cannot be running when a V 54 test is initiated m A Send Pattern Test Send Remote Line Loopback Payload Loopback or Repeater Loopback on the interface to which the port is assigned m DTE Payload Loopback Send Pattern Test or Send FT1 Loopback on the same port Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback The Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback commands a remote device to go into Data Channel Loopback on associated port p Procedure T
99. April 1998 2 5 Management and Control 2 6 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Applications Overview 9161 A2 GH30 30 This chapter provides information about the following applications T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and E amp M T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and APL T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data FXS and E amp M T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and Drop amp Insert Channel Bank Replacement and Additions Off Premises Extension OPX Direct Inward Dial DID Video Conferencing Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits April 1998 3 1 Applications T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data This application supports two ports of high speed data The following diagram depicts a router and a mainframe The data moving through the FEP and the cluster controller is heritage data that is not available on the LAN Because the T1 access unit includes two data ports the router based data can easily be added to the network without disrupting the existing network operations The data rates available to the two applications can be easily changed This allows the router connection to increase in speed It also allows the FEP based data to reduce its data rate as the amount of data transmitted on this route declines naturally over time Cluster FEP Controller Terminal Router Router T1 Access T1 Access Mainframe U
100. B test is initiated m DTE Payload Loopback on the same port April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting DTE Payload Loopback DTPLB The DTE Payload Loopback DTPLB loops the information received on the Network or DSX 1 interface back to the network after it has passed through the port circuitry Use DTPLB for isolating problems on the DTE line An attached device or test equipment must generate and monitor data to be looped back DSX Network Port i Interface M vA DTLB DTLB DCE DCE Port 2 Port1 496 15211 CAUTION The Abort All Test selection from the Tests screen or the system test timeout set via the Test Timeout configuration option on the System Options branch of the menu tree will not interrupt a DTE Loopback test that has been initiated by an attached device since the Local Loopback lead will still be asserted The following tests cannot be running when a DTPLB test is initiated m DTE Loopback Data Channel Loopback or Send Pattern Test on the same port 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 9 29 Troubleshooting Data Channel Loopback DCLB The Data Channel Loopback DCLB loops the data for a particular synchronous data port back to the interface after the information has passed all the way through the device i e just before it is sent to the Customer Premises Equipment Use DCLB to verify the end to end integrity of a circuit for a particular port DSX Network Port Interface All 1s All 1s DCE DCE 4
101. CE clocks transmitted data and uses the interchange circuit DB CCITT 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing TXC DCE source for timing the incoming transmitted data External The DTE externally provides the clock for the transmitted data and the synchronous data port uses the interchange circuit DA CCITT 113 Transmit Signal Element Timing XTXC DTE source for timing the incoming transmitted data NOTE When external clock is used it must be synchronized to the same clock source as the system Invert Transmit Clock Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the clock supplied by the DCE on interchange circuit DB CCITT 114 Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE Source TXC is phase inverted with respect to interchange circuit BA CCITT 103 Transmitted Data TD Use this configuration option when long cable lengths between the NAM and the DTE are causing data errors Enable Phase inverts the TXC clock on the DCE Disable Does not phase invert the TXC clock on the DCE Invert Transmit and Received Data Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the transmitted and received data for the synchronous data port is logically inverted before being transmitted or after being received from the network Use this configuration option for applications where data is being transported using HDLC protocol whereby inverting the
102. Coding dsx1Fdl dsx1Fdl fdl only ifSpeed devDs1FracTable entry with devDs1FracIndex for DDL dsx1 Circuit Identifier main config dsx Interface Status Line Framing Format Line Coding Format Set Read ifAdminStatus to up or down dsxiLineType dsx1LineCoding main config sync Port Status Port Type Port Base Rate Transmit Clock Source Embedded Data Link EDL Management Link Invert Transmit and Received Data Set Read ifAdminStatus to up or down rs232PortType devSyncDataPortConfigBaseRate rs232SyncPortClockSource to internal or external ifAdminStatus to up down of EDL for this port devPortUsage to none or netLink rs232SyncPortEncoding to nrzi main config voice_port Port Status Signaling Type Terminating Impedance Wink Delay Wink Duration Rx Gain Tx Gain Ring back Tone Trunk Cond in CGA Operating Mode Set Read ifAdminStatus to up or down devVoiceConfigSignalingType devVoiceConfigTermlmpedance devVoiceConfigWinkDelay devVoiceConfigWinkDuration devVoiceConfigRxGain devVoiceConfigTxGain devVoiceConfigRingBackTone devVoiceConfigTrunkCondInCGA Read devVoiceConfigOperatingMode D 14 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 15 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object CONFIG main config ocu Set Read Port Status Port Rate Loopback Detection ifAdminStatus to up or d
103. D RR Transmitter Signal Element 114 15 A From DCE 5 A Timing Transmit Timing TXC 12 B 23 B DCE Source Receiver Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE 8 A Receive Timing RXC 9 B 26 B DCE Source Local Loopback LL 141 18 To DCE 10 Data Terminal or DTE Ready 108 1 2 20 To DCE 12 A DTR TR Remote Loopback RL 140 21 To DCE 14 Receive Common RC 102B 23 E 20 29 Transmitter Signal Element 113 24 A To DCE 17 A Terminal Timing TT 11 B 35 B DTE Source Test Mode TM 142 25 From DCE 18 no connection 30 37 E 10 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 EIA 530A to X 21 DTE Adapter Cable 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Used as an interface between the 25 position Sync Data Port connector and a DTE s X 21 connector _ 530 DB15 X 21 Signal Socket Signal TXD A TD A TXD B TD B RXD A RD A RXD B RD B RXC A RXC A RXC B RXC B RTS A RTS A RTS B RTS B RLSD A RR A RLSD B RR B Sig Common TT A TT A TT B TT B Sig Common 496 15146 The following table provides the pin assignments for the 25 position Port 1 or Port 2 connector interface and a DTE s 15 position X 21 connector interface 25 Pin 15 Pin ITU Plug Socket Signal CCITT Pin Direction Pin Transmit Data TXD TD 103 2 A To DCE 2 A 14 B 9 B Received Data
104. DP APM s ports The procedure to send a Latching loopback differs from the procedure to start stop other loopbacks Both procedures are described below Sending a Latching Loopback 9161 A2 GH30 30 p Procedure To send a Latching Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test OCU DP Tests 2 Enter the loopback type For Local CSU or DSU For Remote CSU DSU or OCU 3 Select the code Up or Down 4 Highlight Send in the Command row Then press Return to start the test The code will be sent for up to 10 seconds or until an acknowledgement is received 5 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column 6 Send the Down code to stop the loopback April 1998 9 37 Troubleshooting Starting Stopping Other Loopbacks gt Procedure To start and stop loopback tests 1 Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Tests screen Main Menu gt Test gt OCU DP Tests 2 For Nonlatching loopbacks select the desired loopback type CSU or DSU 3 Highlight Start under Command in the selected test s row Then press Return to start the test This field now displays the word Stop 4 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column 5 Highlight Stop under Command in the selected test s row Then press Return to stop the test This field now displays the word Start OCU DP Local Loopback Tests The following local l
105. DS1TestControl for sendOnes on the interface devDS1TestControl for sendOnes to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for sendtin8 on the interface devDS1TestControl for send1in8 to idle on the interface dsx1SendCode to dsx1Send3in24Pattern for the interface dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendNoCode for the interface devDS1TestControl for send63 on the interface devDS1TestControl for send63 to idle on the interface dsx1SendCode to dsx1Send511 Pattern for the interface dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendNoCode for the interface devDS1TestControl for send2047 on the interface devDS1TestControl for send2047 to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for send2E15 on the interface devDS1TestControl for send2E15 to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for send2E20 on the interface devDS1TestControl for send2E20 to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for sendUserDefined on the interface and devDS1TestArgument to the 2 byte pattern value devDS1TestControl for sendUserDefined to idle on the interface 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 D 7 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 8 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main test network and dsx cont d Start Monitor QRSS Pattern Stop Monitor QRSS Pattern Start Monitor All Zeros Pattern Stop Monitor All Zeros Pattern Start Monitor All Ones Pattern Stop Monitor Alll Ones Pattern Start Monitor 1 in 8 Pattern Stop Monitor 1
106. E E 8 9 Pertorming an Upgrade erem Ree ee RR REY 8 10 Backing Up Your Configuration caai res eenen rimes eee eee 8 12 Resetting the T1 Access Unit 0 0 0 cece eee eee ees 8 13 Resetting the T1 Access Unit from the Control Menu 8 13 Restoring Access to the User Interface 2 00000 eee 8 13 9 Troubleshooting 9161 A2 GH30 30 What Are the Troubleshooting Features 002e eee ee eee 9 1 How Do I Know There Is a Problem lsleueuusss 9 1 TI NAMELEDS cca cece ns ee once ween eee eae EE EE 9 2 T1 NAM Test Jack Functions 000 e cece eee eee 9 4 9161 Single T1 NAM Test Jack Functions 2 0005 9 4 9261 Dual T1 NAM Test Jack Functions 22 2 000 9 5 Dual DSX APM LEDS beer Y REPYSREPESARPYSRIQERTA 9 6 9109 Dual DSX APM Test Jack Functions sssssus 9 7 Joc L 9 8 Sync Data APM Front Panel LEDS 2 heo edeee aa ge EE 9 9 OCU DP APM Front Panel LEDs 000 cece eee eee eee 9 10 Voice APM Front Panel LED sesnees tree pee emen Ra 9 11 System Alarm Relay siirat aaa aa aoi Ea Eaa E eh 9 11 E TE E eae E EE Doe a ee ee oe 9 12 Viewing Alarm Messages 00 cece e eee eee teen eee 9 12 ASCII Alarm Messages isses ke ee eh RD RR REL RRDRAEIEY de 9 12 System Error Messages cc cece eee cece eee eee okini 9 18 Automatic Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs isses 9 19 M
107. E attached to the port may control both the local DTPLB and remote DCLBs Embedded Data Link Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the Embedded Data Link EDL is enabled for the synchronous data port When the EDL is enabled 8 kbps of the total bandwidth allocated for the port are not available to the synchronous data port For example if the port rate is 256 kbps 4 DSO channels allocated and the EDL is enabled then only 248 kbps are available to the port The EDL provides detection of frame synchronization CRC of the data stream excluding the 8 kbps EDL and a 4 kbps inband data link between the local and remote units The 4 kbps in band data link can be used for performance report messages PRMs and as a management link for IP traffic EDL does not appear if Management Link is set to FDL Enable EDL is enabled for the port NOTE EDL must be enabled for both the local port and associated remote port Disable EDL is disabled for the port EDL Management Link Possible Settings Disable Enable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the EDL management link is enabled for IP traffic on the synchronous data port EDL Management Link does not appear if EDL is set to Disable Management Link is set to FDL Enable EDL management link is enabled for IP traffic flow over the 4 kbps in band data link provided by the EDL Disable ED
108. ET MON OUT A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the received Network Monitor Out signal coming out of the network This is a composite of the channels allocated to the network 496 15205 9 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9261 Dual T1 NAM Test Jack Functions ZAN e S Q S O Oe Test Jacks NOW ZLAN NOW HAN 97 15646 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting The T1 NAM has four sets of test jacks located on the upper section of the faceplate Four nonintrusive access points are also provided NET1 NET1 NET2 NET2 In Out In Out TX cesi EIER PE RX NET1 Q diet NET2 RX O Out Circuitry In oS gt TX NET1 NET1 NET2 NET2 MON MON 97 15652 Test Jack Name Function NET1 IN An intrusive test jack that allows a signal to be inserted Network 1 In towards the Network 1 interface by external test equipment NET1 OUT An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from Network 1 Out the Network 1 interface and allows it to be terminated by external test equipment NET1 MON IN Network 1 Monitor In A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal going into the network a composite of all channels allocated to the Network 1 interface NET1 MON OUT Network 1 Monitor Out A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the received signal coming out of the network a composite of all channels allocated to the Network 1 interface
109. Edit Display Management and Communication General SNMP Management The General SNMP Management Options screen appears 4 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Enable SNMP management for the SNMP Management to Enable access unit Assign SNMP community names Community Name 1 and Community Name 2 to a community name text up to 255 characters in length Assign the type of access allowed for Name 1 Access and Name 2 Access to the SNMP community names Read or Read Write 6 6 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Security 5 Press Cirl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 To save changes select Save and press Return 7 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Refer to Setting Up for SNMP Management in Chapter 5 Setting Up for more information about SNMP configuration options Limiting SNMP Access Through IP Addresses The access unit provides an additional level of security by m Limiting the IP addresses of the NMSs that can access the unit m Performing validation checks on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the unit m Specifying the access allowed for the authorized NM
110. H30 30 About the T1 Access Mux Extensive Testing Capability Provides the capability to maintain the T1 access unit and diagnose device and network problems via Menu Driven User Interface Accessed using an async or other VT100 compatible terminal PC emulation or Telnet provides T1 network DSX 1 sync data port voice port and device lamp tests Loopbacks that can be selected for an interface include line payload repeater remote line DTE DTE payload V 54 loop 3 data channel remote data channel V 54 loop 2 or FT1 V 54 digital and analog Pattern Tests that can be selected for an interface include QRSS all zeros all ones 1 in 8 T1 interface only 3 in 24 T1 interface only 63 511 2047 215 1 220 1 and 2 byte user defined Tone and signal tests can also be selected for voice APMs SNMP MIB Object Test Commands Supports the same testing capability as the user interface Paradyne MIBs can be downloaded from our World Wide Web site See page A of this manual for our World Wide Web site address Test Jacks Located on the T1 access unit s faceplate support using external test equipment to perform break in testing and monitoring of the T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces Remove the housing s bezel to access these jacks m Extensive Monitoring Capability Provides status information to help you keep track of and evaluate the unit s and network s operation via Status Branch Provides
111. II terminal or printer attached to the COM port either local or remote via an external device Com Port Generates and sends alarm messages to COM port when the Port Use option is set to Alarm see Table 5 10 Disable Does not generate alarm messages Alarm amp Trap Dial Out Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether alarm or SNMP trap messages initiate a call if a connection on the COM port s external device has not already been established If the call is incomplete and the Call Retry configuration option is set to Enable the alarm or SNMP trap message is held until the call completes or the maximum retry count is exceeded If more that one alarm message is received while waiting for a call retry only the highest priority alarm message received is held all previous messages are discarded When the port is configured as a network communication link up to 10 SNMP messages are held queued at the interface Enable Automatically calls the phone number contained in the Alarm directory Disable Holds queues SNMP trap messages sent to the COM port external device if the COM port external device was not previously established Does not hold alarm messages Trap Disconnect Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the COM port external device connection is disconnected after sending an SNMP trap message This configuration optio
112. L management link is disabled for IP traffic 5 20 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 3 Synchronous Data Port Options 5 of 7 IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the internet protocol address needed to access the EDL IP Address does not appear if EDL Management Link is set to Disable 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Enter the IP address for the EDL The first digit i e Xxx 255 255 255 cannot be 0 or 127 or greater than 223 However 000 000 000 000 is valid representing a null address Clear Clears the IP address and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask for the EDL Subnet Mask does not appear if EDL Management Link is set to Disable 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Enter the subnet mask for the EDL Subnet Mask is based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 Clear Clears the subnet mask and fills the field with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Routing Information Protocol Possible Settings None Proprietary Default Setting Proprietary Specifies which routing information protocol RIP is used to enable routing of manageme
113. LB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either the ANSI 403 Annex B standard for in band signaling for fractional T1 FT1 channel loopbacks are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB for the port Both DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with either the ANSI or V 54 standard are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB for the port 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 19 Setting Up Table 5 3 Synchronous Data Port Options 4 of 7 Port DTE Initiated Loopbacks Possible Settings Disable DTPLB DCLB Both Default Setting Disable Allows the initiation and termination of a local Data Payload Loopback DTPLB or a remote Data Channel Loopback DCLB to be controlled by the DTE for the synchronous data port Disable The DTE attached to the port does not control the Local DTPLB and remote DCLBs DTPLB The DTE attached to the port may control the DTPLB for the port The loopback is controlled by the interchange circuit LL CCITT 141 Local Loopback as specified by V 54 The port remains in DTPLB loopback as long as interchange circuit remains on DCLB The DTE attached to the port may control the DCLB for the connected remote port The loopback is controlled by the interchange circuit RL CCITT 140 Remote Loopback as specified by V 54 NOTE The remote equipment must support in band V 54 loopback Both The DT
114. Loopbacks 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting A Digital Loopback loops the digital voice signal received from the T1 interface back to the same interface just before reaching the D to A converter on the voice port CODEC DtoA Digital Loopback Converter to T1 Interface 496 15200 The following tests cannot be running when a digital loopback test is initiated m Analog Loopback DRS or Quiet Test Tone on the same port An Analog Loopback loops the analog voice signal received from the T1 interface back to the same interface after passing through the Digital to Analog converter and Analog to Digital converter on the voice port CODEC LM w Analog Loopback lt to T1 Interface 496 15201 The following tests cannot be running when an Analog Loopback test is initiated DRS or Quiet Test Tone or Digital or Line Loopback on the same port April 1998 9 33 Troubleshooting Line Loopbacks This test is only available for a voice port belonging to an E amp M APM A Line Loopback loops the analog voice signal received from the analog line device connected to the port back to the same line device before passing through the A to D converter on the voice port CODEC DtoA Savon Line Loopback to Analog Device 496 15202 The following tests cannot be running when a Line Loopback is initiated DRS or Quiet Test Tone or Analog Loopback on the same port Test Tones The f
115. M FXO Voice 8 port FXO Voice APM FXS Voice 8 port FXS Voice APM OCU 2 2 port OCU DP APM OCU 6 6 port OCU DP APM Empty The slot is empty Misconfig The slot contains a misconfigured APM Unsupport The slot contains an unrecognized APM Failed The slot contained an APM that has been removed or is no longer operational April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying DSX 1 Channels Displaying System Information Use the Network Channel Display screen to display all of the DSO assignments for each DSO on the DSX 1 interface This screen also provides information on the slot assignment for each NAM or APM type Use the following menu sequence to display DSX 1 channel information Main Menu Status Cross Connect Status DSX 1 Channel Display Select the desired DSX 1 slot and port NOTE The DSX 1 Channel screen will not appear if the Interface Status field on the DSX 1 Interface Option screen is set to Disable The DSX 1 Channel Display screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one DSX 1 interface time slot The top field represents the time slot of the DSX 1 Interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field DSX 1 time slot The following information is available for viewing The DSX 1 Time Slot Fields top Indicate D01 to D24 The DSX 1 Int
116. MIB Object main status performance port Near End Current Current Interval Timer Error Events Counter ES UAS SES BES LOFC Near End Intervals ES UAS SES BES LOFC Near End 8 Hour Totals Valid Intervals ES UAS SES BES LOFC Near End Clear Statistics Far End Current Current Interval Timer Error Events Counter ES UAS SES BES LOFC Far End Intervals ES UAS SES BES LOFC Complete For the port Read value in devEDLCurrentTimer devEDLCurrentEvent devEDLCurrentESs devEDLCurrentUASs devEDLCurrentSESs devEDLCurrentBESs devEDLCurrentLOFC Select interval number with devEDLIntervalNumber then Read value in devEDLIntervalESs devEDLIntervalUASs devEDLIntervalSESs devEDLIntervalBESs devEDLIntervalLOFC For the port Read value in devEDLTotalValidIntervals devEDLTotalESs devEDLTotalUASs devEDLTotalSESs devEDLTotalBESs devEDLTotalLOFC For the port Set devEDLCIrRegWhichRegs to nearRegisters and devEDLCIrRegAction to clear For the port Read value in devEDLFarEndCurrentTimer devEDLFarEndCurrentEvent devEDLFarEndCurrentESs devEDLFarEndCurrentUASs devEDLFarEndCurrentSESs devEDLFarEndCurrentBESs devEDLFarEndCurrentLOFC Select interval number with devDataPortIntervalNumber then Read value in devEDLFarEndintervalESs devEDLFarEndiIntervalUASs devEDLFarEndintervalSESs devEDLFarEndintervalBESs devEDLFarEndiIntervalLOFC devEDLFarEndintervalCmpl 9161 A2 GH30 3
117. MS at the central site m Each remote T1 access unit through a management link multiple EDLs Ethernet SNMP NMS 135 18 2 17 135 18 40 1 LAN Adapter COM Port IP Address 135 18 40 3 r Subnet 135 18 2 0 Subnet 135 18 40 0 Physical Connection EDL Management Link 496 15185 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 B 3 IP Addressing Routing to Remote T1 Access Units on the Same Subnet In this example T1 Access Unit A is connected to m The NMS at the central site m Remote T1 access units through EDL management links The illustration shows two management EDL management links at the central site with T1 Access Units B and C connected through one EDL management link Ethernet SNMP NMS 135 18 40 1 LAN Adapter COM Port IP Address 135 18 40 3 135 18 2 26 Subnet 135 18 2 0 Subnet 135 18 40 0 Physical Connection EDL Management Link 496 15186 B 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 IP Addressing Routing to Remote Access Units Using Different Subnets In this example T1 Access Unit A is connected to m The NMS at the central site Two remote T1 access units through EDL management links The illustration shows two EDL management links with T1 Access Units B and C connected through one EDL management link By configuring a different IP address and subnet for each management link m T
118. Management configuration option to Disable Disable is the factory default setting Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area To save changes select Save and press Return Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the Screen April 1998 6 5 Security Refer to Setting Up for SNMP Management in Chapter 5 Setting Up for more information about SNMP configuration options Assigning SNMP Community Names and Access Levels The General SNMP Options screen provides the configuration options that allow the T1 access unit to be managed by an SNMP manager supporting the SNMP protocol Use this screen to m Assign the SNMP community names that are allowed to access the unit s Management Information Base MIB m Specify the type of access allowed for each SNMP community name NOTE Community names are case sensitive B gt Procedure To assign SNMP community names and access levels 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 3 Follow this menu selection sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration
119. NAM and the DTE 133 266 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 266 feet of cable between the NAM and the DTE 266 399 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 399 feet of cable between the NAM and the DTE 399 533 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 533 feet of cable between the NAM and the DTE 533 655 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 655 feet of cable between the NAM and the DTE Send All Ones on DSX 1 Failure Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether action is taken when a valid signal cannot be recovered for the DSX 1 LOS continuous OOF or AIS Enable Sends all ones on the DSO channels allocated to the DSX 1 interface in the event of an LOS AIS or continuous OOS condition on the DSX 1 interface Disable No action is taken when a signal fails on the DSX 1 interface The data received is passed through the network interface channels unchanged Loss of Signal LOS Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when a loss of signal condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message Out of Frame OOF Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when an out of frame
120. OCU Line LB Slot ss Port p An OCU Line Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p OCU Data LB Slot ss Port p An OCU Data Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying System Information Table 7 4 Test Status Messages 2 of 2 Message What It Indicates OCU DS 0 LB Slot ss Port p An DSO Loopback test is on the OCU DP interface in slot ss port p Voice DLB Slot ss Port p A voice Digital Loopback DLB test is active on slot ss port p Voice ALB Slot ss Port p A voice Analog Loopback ALB is active on slot ss port p Voice LLB Slot ss Port p A voice Line Loopback LLB test is active on slot ss port p Voice DRS Slot ss Port p A voice Digital Reference DRS test is active on slot ss port p Voice Quiet Slot ss Port p A voice quiet tone test is active on slot ss port p Forced Signal Slot ss Port p A forced signaling test is active on slot ss port p Pttn Active Networkn A ptin test test patterns for Network 1 or Network 2 is active on Network n Pttn Active DSXss p A pttn test test patterns for the DSX 1 interface in slot ss port p is active Pttn Active Slot ss Port p A pttn test test patterns for Sync Data port is active on slot ss port p Mon Pttn Network n A Monitor pttn test patterns for the Net
121. OM port to modem COM port to PC EIA 530A to RS449 DTE adapter EIA 530A to V 35 DTE adapter EIA 530A to X 21 DTE Adapter extension LAN adapter to COM port modular T1 RJ48S network T1 Line Interface T1 mass termination RJ48H voice APM Call Retry changing configuration options device name 8 7 directory numbers login channel allocation 5 38 Channel Assignments worksheet channel bank replacement and additions channels DSX 1 network Character matching Character Length Circuit Identifier Clearing Performance Statistics 7 16 clearing existing information clearing cross connection assignments 5 36 Clock Failure Alarm Primary 5 51 Secondary 5 51 IN 2 clock source primary secondary COM port configuring an external device 2 3 pin assignments signals Command Complete 7 16 Communication Port IP Address options setting up for external device 5 57 Subnet Mask Communication Port Link Protocol Communication Protocol options Community Name assigning 6 6 Community Name 1 5 70 Community Name 2 5 71 Community Name Access components NAM T1 Access Unit 5 18 SNMP to user interface cross reference Configuration backup changing options copy DSX 1 interface 5 14 end to end management control external device 2 3 local management control menu branch Network interface 5 7 OCU DP ports 5 32 order ports
122. OS Loss of Frame LOF Excessive Error Rate EER Yellow a Alarm Indication Signal AIS OFF No alarm condition is present on the DSX1 DSX2 interface General Status LED Label Indication Color What It Means OK Power and Operational Status Green ON The APM has power and is operational OFF The APM is in a local self test or there is a failure April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting 9109 Dual DSX APM Test Jack Functions The Dual DSX APM test jacks are used for Accessing and testing towards the DSX 1 port m Accessing and testing towards the DSX 2 port DSX1 DSX1 DSX2 DSX2 In Out In Out In Pout E TX lt O lt O RX Internal DSX1 O O DSX2 RX 076 Out Circuitry In a ay gt TX DSX1 DSX1 DSX2 DSX2 MON MON 97 15653 Test Jack Name Function o DSX1 IN An intrusive test jack that allows a signal to be inserted towards the equipment attached to the DSX1 interface by 9 external test equipment 5 9 DSX1 OUT An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from 2 9 the equipment attached to the DSX1 interface and allows it Id to be terminated by external test equipment g 9 DSX1 MON IN A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the transmitted 9 DSX1 Monitor In signal going into the network a composite of all channels slo allocated to
123. PM has power and is operational Operational OFF APM is in a local self test or there is a Status A failure Port 1 Port 2 Port 3 and Port 4 LEDs Label Indication Color What It Means 1 OK Operational Green ON The interchange circuits for the port 2 OK Status are in the correct state to transmit 3 OK and receive data FOR OFF The port is idle Occurs if the port is disabled if an EDL Out of Frame or EER condition is present if a DCLB is active or if the port is configured to monitor DTR and or RTS and the lead s is not asserted April 1998 9 9 Troubleshooting OCU DP APM Front Panel LEDs The 2 port OCU DP APM has three LED status indicators The 6 port OCU DP p APM has seven LEDs General Status LED Label Indication Color What It Means OK Power and Green ON APM has power and is operational oe OFF APM is in a local self test or there is a failure e O i Q Port 1 to 6 LEDs c Label Indication Color What It Means LEDs 1 TST Operational Yellow ON Atestis in progress epi gratus OFF No testis active on the port including 4 TST all test pattern generation and any 5 TST loopback that may be active on the 6 TST local loop or the OCU DP APM 98 15924 2 e O 6 c LEDs 98 15925 9 10 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Voice APM Front Panel LED The E amp M FXO and FXS Analog Voice APMs e
124. S Pattern devSyncPortTestControl for sendQRSS on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for sendQRSS to idle on the interface Start Send All Zeros Pattern Stop Send All Zeros Pattern devSyncPortTestControl for sendZeros on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for senaZeros to idle on the interface Start Send All Ones Pattern Stop Send All Ones Pattern devSyncPortTestControl for sendOnes on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for sendOnes to idle on the interface Start Send 63 Pattern Stop Send 63 Pattern devSyncPortTestControl for send63 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for send63 to idle on the interface Start Send 511 Pattern Stop Send 511 Pattern devSyncPortTestControl for send511 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for send511 to idle on the interface Start Send 2047 Pattern Stop Send 2047 Pattern devSyncPortTestControl for send2047 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for send2047 to idle on the interface Start Send 219 1 Pattern Stop Send 215 1 Pattern devSyncPortTestControl for send2E15 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for send2E15to idle on the interface Start Send 220 1 Pattern Stop Send 220 1 Pattern devSyncPortTestControl for send2E20 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for send2E20 to idle on the interface Siarl Sena User Dennen Patern devSyncPortTestControl for sendUserDefined on the interface and devSyncPortTestArgument to the 2 byte pattern value devSyncPortTestContro
125. S when IP address validation is performed The SNMP NMS Security Options screen provides the configuration options that determine whether security checking is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to communicate with the unit Make sure that the SNMP Management configuration option is set to Enable Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Desired configuration area Management and Communication General SNMP Management SNMP Management Enable p Procedure To limit SNMP access through IP addresses 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 3 Follow this menu selection sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display Management and Communication gt SNMP NMS Security The SNMP NMS Security Options screen appears 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 6 7 Security 4 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Enable IP address checking NMS IP Validation to Enable Specify the number between 1 and 10 of Number of Managers to the desired SNMP management systems that are number authorized to send SNMP messages to the access unit Specify the IP address es that identifies NMS n IP Address to the appropriate t
126. Setting Up Table 5 1 Network Interface Options 5 of 7 Routing Information Protocol Possible Settings None Proprietary Default Setting Proprietary Specifies whether routing information protocol RIP is used for routing of management information between NAMs Routing Information Protocol only appears if Management Link is set to FDL or DDL None No routing protocol is used Use this setting when the device at the other end of the management link cannot accept routing information Proprietary A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing information between NAMs to enable the routing of IP traffic Network Time Slot Possible Settings 01 24 Default Setting lowest available time slot Specifies the time slot for the DDL management link Network Time Slot only appears appears if Management Link is set to DDL NOTE If Management Link is not set to DDL the assigned time slot will be set to unassigned 01 24 Valid settings consist of any unassigned time slot within the 01 24 range Circuit Identifier Possible Settings Text Field Clear Default Setting blank Identifies the transmission vendor s circuit information for the purpose of facilitating troubleshooting Text Field Edit or display circuit identifier information maximum 255 characters Clear Removes the circuit identifier information Loss of Signal LOS Alarm
127. Sync Data Ports to DSX 1 Timeslots or to Another Sync Data Port Use the worksheets in Appendix A and the following procedures to assign cross connections 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 37 Setting Up DSX 1 INTERFACE D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 NETWORK INTERFACE D16 D17 N1 D18 N2 D19 N3 D20 N4 D21 NS D22 NG D23 N7 D24 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 Nid PORTS N15 Kae PRT 1 N17 N18 Nio PRT 2 N20 N21 iS PRT3 N23 N24 PRT4 493 14340 Example Channel Allocation 5 38 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Assigning DSX 1 Timeslots to the Network Interface 9161 A2 GH30 30 DSX 1 timeslots are assigned by channel allocation where you specify individual timeslots The DSX 1 interface must be enabled to assign DSX 1 timeslots to the Network interface Value Meaning Nxx The lower field represents timeslot xx of the selected Network interface Assigned The timeslot is already assigned to something other than a DSX 1 timeslot so it is unavailable Assigned timeslots cannot be modified from this screen Available The timeslot is currently unassigned Dss plyy Timeslot yy of DSX 1 interface p in slot ss is assigned to the Network timeslot identified right above it Nxx Timeslot assignment rules m Valid Network timeslots are either labeled as Available or contain a DSX 1 timeslot assignment m Valid DSX 1 timeslots are tho
128. TT B TT B DTR DTR RL RL LL LL TM TM SIG COMMON Zr rIScXxmmoxeswum eme 497 15233 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 E 7 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments E 8 The following table provides the pin assignments for the 25 position Port 1 or Port 2 connector interface and a DTE s 34 position V 35 connector 25 Pin 34 Pin ITU Plug Socket Signal CCITT Pin Direction Pin Shield 1 A Transmit Data TXD 103 2 A To DCE P A 14 B S B Received Data RXD 104 3 A From DCE R A 16 B T B Request to Send RTS 105 4 To DCE C Clear to Send CTS 106 5 From DCE D Data Set or DCE Ready DSR 107 6 From DCE E Signal Ground Common SG 102 7 23 B Data Channel Received Line 109 8 From DCE F Signal Detector RLSD or LSD Transmitter Signal Element 113 24 A To DCE U A Terminal Timing TT 11 B W B DTE Source Transmitter Signal Element Timing 114 15 A From DCE Y A TXC DCE Source 12 B AA B Receiver Signal Element Timing 115 17 A From DCE V A RXC DCE Source 9 B X B Local Loopback LL 141 18 To DCE L Data Terminal or DTE Ready 108 1 2 20 To DCE H DTR Loopback Maintenance RL 140 21 To DCE N Test Mode Indicator TM 142 25 From DCE NN April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 EIA 530A to RS449 DTE Adapter Cable 9161 A2 GH30 30 Used as an i
129. Table 5 9 System Options in Chapter 5 Setting Up Starting and Stopping a Test Use this procedure to start and or abort specific tests To abort all active tests on all interfaces see Aborting All Tests on page 9 44 When the status of a testis The only command available is Inactive Start Active Stop You start or stop an individual test using the same general procedure For more specific instructions see the individual test descriptions in this chapter gt Procedure To start or stop a test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test 2 Select a test screen for an interface and press Return The selected test screen appears with the cursor positioned in the Command column of the first line available test Start or Stop appears in the Command column and Active or Inactive appears in the Status column based upon the test s current status for that interface 3 Select the test you want to start or stop and press Return The selected test for the interface changes from Stop to Start or from Stop to Start also changing the status of the test 4 Press Return again to start or stop the test 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 9 43 Troubleshooting Aborting All Tests Use the Abort All Tests selection from the Test menu to abort all tests running on all interfaces with exception to Network or DTE initiated loopbacks To abort individual tests that are active see Starting and S
130. TestControl for mon511 to idle on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon2047 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon2047 to idle on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon2E15 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon2E15to idle on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon2E20 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon2E20 to idle on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for monUserDefined on the interface and devSyncPortTestArgument to the 2 byte pattern value devSyncPortTestControl for monUserDefined to idle on the interface devSyncPortSendControllnjectErr fo inject devSyncPortMonResultErrorCount to clear Read value in devSyncPortMonResultErrorCount devSyncPortSendControlErrorCount D 10 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 11 of 16 Tx ABCD Bits Rx ABCD Bits Tip amp Ring Leads E Lead State M Lead State From devVoiceTestType User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main test port voice Set devVoiceTestType to With devVoiceTestAction set to Start Digital Loopback digitalLoopback start Stop Digital Loopback digitalLoopback stop Start Analog Loopback analogLoopback start Stop Analog Loopback analogLoopback stop Start Line Loopback lineLoopback start Stop Line Loopback lineLoopback stop Start Send DRS to T1 networkDRSTone start Stop Send DRS to T1 networkDRSTone stop Start Send DRS to
131. Transmit Clock IP Address 5 21 assigning addresses and subnet masks limiting SNMP access using scheme examples selecting a scheme IP connectivity K keyboard keys keys keyboard screen function L Lamp Test LAN adapter and cables Latching Loopback LEDs Limit of six Login IDs reached limiting async terminal direct access SNMP access through IP addresses Telnet access Line Build Out LBO Line Coding Format DSX 1 Network 5 8 9161 A2 GH30 30 Index Line Equalization Line Framing Format DSX 1 Network 5 7 Line Loopback Link Traps Link Traps ree 577 linkUp Down traps LLB 9 23 locked out 6 2 logging in out Login changing 6 9 creating 6 8 deleting 6 9 login Login Login Required loopback available tests Loopback Detection OCU DP Loss of Loop Timing Alarm OCU DP 5 34 Loss of Signal LOS Loss of Signal LOS Alarm Loss of Signal Alarm OCU DP M Main Menu screen branch maintenance 8 1 making input selections 4 7 Management Direct link to remote T1 units paths SNMP Management and Communication options worksheet management interface selecting management link creating Memory Fail status 7 23 Menu main menu 4 1 branches path selecting from April 1998 IN 5 Index menu driven user interface Menus Messages health 7 17 status 7 17 messages ASCII Alarm Self Test EM 7 22 system
132. able of accepting a software download from a PC through its COM port to support a file transfer or software upgrade The Download feature is used only by your service representative to update your access unit The T1 access unit supports a standard File Transfer Protocol FTP server over Transmission Control Protocol TCP to allow you to transfer configuration and program files to from a T1 access unit node A complete binary image of the configuration can be copied to a host to provide a backup The T1 access unit must be configured to support FTP sessions Initiate an FTP session to a T1 access unit node in the same way as you would initiate an FTP to any other IP addressable device Be aware of the following rules when doing a file transfer m You must have Access Level 1 permission to use the put command m You cannot put a file to the factory cfg file under the system directory m You can only put a NAM program file nam1 ctl ocd nam2 low ocd or nam3_hi ocd to a T1 access unit It cannot be uploaded from a node to a host m You must change to the system directory m Before putting a download file you must use the bin binary command to place the data connection in Binary mode April 1998 8 9 Operation and Maintenance p Procedure To initiate an FTP session 1 Start the FTP client program on your host For example on a Unix host type ftp followed by the IP address of the T1 access unit 2 If a login and password are
133. accept the APM upon loading or saving a configuration or via an enterprise MIB When you accept the new APM the previous APM s configuration is deleted the new APM s configuration options are set to factory defaults and the screens and field choices applicable to the new APM will be displayed If you reject the APM the configuration options for the previous APM can be edited but all other configuration options and screens will not display fields or choices or MIB objects applicable to either the previous or the current APM 8 8 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 APM Removal NAM Removal Operation and Maintenance When you remove an APM from its slot you can still edit the applicable configuration options If you are displaying a Status or Test screen when you remove an APM The message APM Removed will display after the screen is refreshed and all fields relating to the APM will be cleared m Only the ESC Previous menu Main Menu and Exit virtual functions will be available when no other valid slots are available to select MIB objects applicable to the removed APM and attempts to do a get or set of those objects will display the message No Such Name Although you can safely remove the T1 NAM from the housing with power on the T1 access unit does not support hot swapping of the T1 NAM All APM configurations travel with the NAM Downloading Software File Transfer 9161 A2 GH30 30 The access unit is cap
134. ach have 1 LED status indicator General Status LED Label Indication Color What It Means OK Power and Green ON APM has power and is operational E OFF APM is in a local self test or there is a failure O 3 Q 3 5 97 15643 System Alarm Relay The 5 slot housing and the access carrier provide an alarm system relay that you can configure to activate when an alarm condition is present To use the system alarm relay you must m See the 5 slot housing or access carrier installation instructions for information on how to connect the alarm relay connector m Set the following configuration option Main Menu Configuration Edit Display Alarm Options System Alarm Relay Enable m Ensure that the System Alarm Relay Cut off under the Control branch is not selected This menu selection turns off the system alarm relay 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 9 11 Troubleshooting Alarms The T1 access unit monitors alarm conditions occurring on either the m Network interface m DSX 1 interface or m Sync data ports You select the ASCII alarms that you wish to receive for each interface on the T1 access unit via the Network Interface configuration option screen Viewing Alarm Messages You can view alarm messages via the m Health and Status screen m Messages on Line 24 of the user interface screen m Printout from your ASCII terminal printer ASCII Alarm Messages The following message
135. ach interface 1 Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Load Configuration From Screen Main Menu Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return The Configuration Edit Display screen appears 3 Select the ASCII alarms to enable for the interface To enable Set the configuration option s T1 alarms Configuration Network DSX 1 alarms Configuration gt DSX 1 Sync Data Ports alarms Configuration Sync Data Ports OCU DP Ports alarms Configuration OCU DP Ports 4 Configure the phone directory to use for dialing out alarms see Displaying Directory Numbers and Changing Directory Numbers in Chapter 8 Operation and Maintenance 5 Select Alarm from the Configuration Edit Display menu and press Return The Alarms Options screen appears To Set the configuration option Automatically initiate a call dial out Alarm amp Trap Dial Out to Enable Retry the call if the call cannot be Call Retry to Enable completed Enable ASCII alarms Configuration Alarm 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 9 19 Troubleshooting 6 Press Cirl a to switch to the screen function key area 7 To save changes select Save and press Return The Save Configuration To screen appears 8 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the scre
136. ack Repeater Loopback Pattern tests QRSS All zeroes All ones 1 in 8 3 in 24 63 511 2047 215 4 220 4 user defined DSX 1 Tests Sync Data Port tests DTE Loopback DTE Payload Loopback Data Channel Loopback Remote Loopbacks V 54 FT1 Pattern tests QRSS All zeroes All ones 63 511 2047 215 1 220 1 user defined Sync Data Port Tests April 1998 9 21 Troubleshooting To access the Select Voice Port tests Voice Port Tests Digital Loopback Analog Loopback Line Loopback Test tones DRS Quiet Force Signaling Monitor Signaling OCU DP tests OCU DP Tests Local Loopback Latching Loopback Nonlatching Loopback OCU Loopback DS 0 Payload Loopback Line Loopback Data Loopback Remote Loopback Latching LB Nonlatching LB Pattern tests All zeroes All ones 63 511 2047 Lamp test Device Tests Interface Tests The interface tests run on the T1 access unit s Network 1 or 2 or DSX 1 interfaces gt Procedure To start and stop a Line Payload or Repeater Loopback test 1 9 22 Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Tests screen Main Menu Test Network Tests DSX 1 Tests For Network tests select the desired Network interface 1 for 9161 NAM 1 or 2 for 9261 NAM For DSX 1 tests enter the slot and port number of the desired DSX 1 interface Highlight Start under Command in the selected test s row Then press Retu
137. ady to receive signaling information This consists of detecting an off hook signal from the CO which initiates a configurable wink delay followed by a configurable off hook signal back to the CO PLAR Private Line Automatic Ring down PLAR allows hotline point to point dedicated connection of two phones When one phone goes off hook the other phone starts ringing DPO The Dial Pulse Originating DPO mode is similar to FXS except for supporting out going one way trunks from a PBX direct outward dialing or key system or station instrument No ringing is provided in this mode April 1998 5 29 Setting Up Table 5 6 FXS Voice Slot ss Port p Options 2 of 4 Signaling Type Possible Settings Loop Start Loop Start Fwd Disc Ground Start Ground Start Immediate Ground Start Automatic d3 d4 Default Setting Loop Start Determines the type of signaling for the FXS voice port Signaling Type only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Operating Mode is not set to DPO Loop Start Enables the signaling used for basic telephone service stations simple PBX trunks or key systems Loop Start only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS FXSDN or FXSDN WINK Loop Start Fwd Disc Enables the signaling used for automated answering equipment This selection only appears if Operating Mode is set to FXS FXSDN or FXSDN WINK Ground Start Enables the signaling used for two way PBX
138. ain Menu screen appears Begin your session Security is enabled You are prompted for a login ID and password Enter your ID and password If Invalid Password appears see System Error Messages in Chapter 9 Troubleshooting You are attempting to access through Telnet and the user interface is currently in session The message Connection refused appears T1 access unit allows only one connection at a time Wait and try again You are attempting direct access through the COM port and the user interface is currently in session via an in band Telnet session The message User Interface Already In Use appears with the active user s IP address See System Status Messages in Chapter 7 Displaying System Information The T1 access unit has the Communication Port and Login Required configuration options enabled and there is no contention for the user interface The Login screen appears Enter your ID and password If Invalid Password appears see System Error Messages in Chapter 9 Troubleshooting April 1998 8 3 Operation and Maintenance Ending a Session Use the Exit function key from any screen to terminate the session p Procedure To end a session 1 Press Ctrl a to go to the screen function key area 2 Select Exit and press Return If connected through Then the Direct connection via the COM port Idle screen appears Tel
139. and receive voice frequency signals FXS Voice options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable Enable The port is active and can be configured and assigned to a timeslot Disable The port is not active cannot be configured and does not take up a time slot No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated Existing cross connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared The message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl a key acts as a No Yes Port status is disabled and any cross connections are cleared Operating Mode Possible Settings FXS FXSDN FXSDN WINK PLAR DPO Default Setting FXS Selects the operating mode for the FXS voice port Operating Mode only appears if Port Status is set to Enable FXS Enables the Foreign Exchange Station FXS mode supporting a bidirectional connection to a telephone device PBX or key system trunk This mode uses 4 state signaling A amp B FXSDN Enables Foreign Exchange Station Software Defined Network FXSDN mode for operation on software defined networks This mode is used by Class 4 switches and uses 2 state signaling A B FXSDN WINK Enables the mode FXSDN with WINK which is similar to FXSDN but in addition provides an indication to the central office CO when the station equipment is re
140. anual Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs 0000ee eee 9 20 Tests Avallablg cceli ae etude leita vite eke ed eRe es 9 21 Interlate TestS P TT 9 22 Lines lOGpback scoedose erga s re we e wee reeked x 9 23 PPaviaad LGOODECK icone t E EE REpRERFUEROREUPENE ECT EDPESS 9 24 Repeater Loopback 000 cece teen eee eee 9 25 Remote LOODDACKS eese Db rh ERR ERR ds 9 26 Sending and Monitoring Pattern Tests 00000ee eee 9 27 April 1998 v Contents Data Pon TSS 2c vied C 9 28 DRE Loopback DTEB 2usDie erri ey RE XUI XAR XS S 9 28 DTE Payload Loopback DTPEB c mri 9 29 Data Channel Loopback DOLB 0 00 e eee 9 30 V 54 Remote LOOPBACK sasssa cee toy aue etri ere b sees 9 30 Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback 2 0000eeeee 9 31 Sending and Monitoring Pattern Tests 02020ee eae 9 32 VOICGH Ole Ic CLE 9 32 Digital Lo0pDaeKS scissa Ung eee eee Seen ee eee ee 9 33 Analog LOOPDACKS cs ccr eee eee etes P eee ee ds 9 33 Line Loopbacks 2 sese esee mee e he 9 34 TES TONES HET 9 34 Force and Monitor Signaling ece creicereiererireesisceicenri en 9 35 OCU DP TES S zt dece eben Po E po on Rn E oec ee eo 9 37 Sending a Latching Loopback ssseslllllesssssse 9 37 Starting Stopping Other Loopbacks sueuuessssss 9 38 OCU DP Local Loopback Tests aere nme ne emnt 9 38 DDS CSU DSU Latching Nonlatching Loopback
141. ation option NMS n IP Address to the IP address that identifies each SNMP manager s indicated in the Number of SNMP Managers configuration option Specify the network destination for the Trap Manager Destination to one of the following Default COM FDL EDL slot and port number Select the type of SNMP trap messages to be sent from the T1 access unit General Traps to enable or disable warmStart and authenticationFailure traps Enterprise Specific Traps to enable or disable enterpriseSpecific traps Link Traps to enable or disable linkDown and linkUp traps Link Traps Interfaces to specify which interfaces will generate linkDown linkUp and enterpriseSpecific traps April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 17 SNMP Trap Options 1 of 3 SNMP Traps Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines if SNMP trap messages are sent to the currently configured trap manager s Enable Sends trap messages Disable Does not send trap messages Number of Trap Managers Possible Settings 1 6 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems to receive SNMP trap messages from the NAM An NMS IP Address must be configured in the NMS n IP Address configuration option for each trap manager to receive trap messages 1 6 Specifies the number of trap managers NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000
142. atus and Results 9 44 anid oe Timeout Tones 9 34 V 54 remote loopback voice port time setting Timeout Test Transmission Control Protocol Transmit Clock z 2 Index Transmit Timing 5 9 Trap Disconnect Traps Enterprise Specific 5 74 General SNMP setting up traps authentificationFailure C 2 dialing out SNMP enterprise specific linkUp and Mr warmstart troubleshooting features Trunk Cond in CGA two slot housing Tx Attenuation dB E amp M 5 25 FXO Tx Gain dB FXS U upgradability upgrade 8 10 user interface 1 9 access Already in Use Idle resetting restoring access setting options worksheet IN 10 V V 54 Remote Loopback valid COM port directory characters Video Conferencing Voice APM status 7 3 voice APM voice ports tests voice ports assigning configure worksheet VT100 compatible terminal direct management control W warmStart trap Wink Delay FXS Wink Delay 10ms FXO Wink Duration FXS Wink Duration 10ms FXO Work Areas switching between April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30
143. ayed You can also type in the desired slot number to Repeat Steps 2 and 3 to select the slot and port to copy configuration options Press Enter to begin the copy process If the Then the Copy To slot and Copy To port are set to a specific slot and port number Copy To slot and port configuration options are replaced by the Copy From slot and port configurations options Copy To slot is set to a specific number and the Copy To port is set to All Configuration options of all ports on the Copy To slot are replaced by the Copy From slot and port configuration options Copy To slot is set to All the Copy To port is set to a specific number Configuration options of the Copy To port of all slots containing the same type of port Voice E amp M Voice FXO Voice FXS Sync Data or OCU DP as on the Copy From slot are replaced by the Copy From slot and port configuration options Copy To slot and the Copy To port are both set to All Configuration options of all ports of all slots containing the same type of port Voice E amp M Voice FXS Sync Data or OCU DP as on the Copy From slot are replaced by the Copy From slot and port configuration options 6 Select Perform Copy Then Increment if you want to automatically change the values to the next higher port of the same type If the last port of the highest slot was specified the value will change to Port 1 of the lowest slot con
144. back Start Payload Loopback Stop Payload Loopback Start Repeater Loopback Stop Repeater Loopback Send Line Loopback Up Send Line Loopback Down Start Send QRSS Pattern Stop Send QRSS Pattern Start Send All Zeros Pattern Stop Send All Zeros Pattern Start Send All Ones Pattern Stop Send All Ones Pattern Start Send 1 in 8 Pattern Stop Send 1 in 8 Pattern Start Send 3 in 24 Pattern Stop Send 3 in 24 Pattern Start Send 63 Pattern Stop Send 63 Pattern Start Send 511 Pattern Stop Send 511 Pattern Start Send 2047 Pattern Stop Send 2047 Pattern Start Send 215 1 Pattern Stop Send 215 1 Pattern Start Send 220 1 Pattern Stop Send 220 1 Pattern Start Send User Defined Pattern Stop User Defined Pattern User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object TEST main test network and dsx Set dsx1LoopbackConfig to dsx1LineLoop for the interface dsx1LoopbackConfig to dsx1NoLoop for the interface dsx1LoopbackConfig to dsx1PayloadLoop for the interface dsx1LoopbackConfig to dsx1NoLoop for the interface devDS1TestControl for rib on the interface devDS1TestControl for r b to idle on the interface dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendLineCode for the network interface dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendHesetCode for the network interface dsx1SendCode to dsx1SenaQRS for the interface dsx1SendCode to dsx1SendResetCode for the interface devDS1TestControl for senaZeros on the interface devDS1TestControl for senaZeros to idle on the interface dev
145. back DTE Loopback DSX 1 Line Loopback DSX 1 Payload Loopback and DSX 1 Repeater Loopback April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Technical Specifications 9161 A2 GH30 30 Specification Criteria Sync Data APM Weight Sync Data APM Sync Data I O card 15 oz 425 kg 6 oz 170 kg Size Sync Data APM Sync Data I O card 11 58 x 8 00 29 41 cm x 20 32 cm 2 90 x 10 15 7 37 cm x 25 78 cm Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 35 F to 122 F 1 7 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Power Consumption 5 8 watts 0 48 amps input current at 12 volts DTE Ports Interfaces Standards EIA 530A V 35 RS 449 V 11 X 21 Rates Nx64 64K to 1 536 Mb Nx56 56K to 1 344 Mb Loopbacks Standard V 54 Loop 2 DCLB and V 54 Loop 3 DTPLB Additional DTE Loopback April 1998 F 3 Technical Specifications F 4 Specification Criteria Dual DSX APM Weight DSX APM 15 oz 425 kg DSX I O card 6 oz 170 kg Size DSX APM Z DSX 1 0 card 11 58 x 8 00 29 41 cm x 20 32 cm 2 90 x 10 15 7 37 cm x 25 78 cm Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 35 F to 122 F 1 7 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70
146. bles Manuals Rack Mount 5 Slot Housing without bezel and chassis skins 9265 A1 209 9261 Dual T1 NAM AC Power Supply Cables Manuals Desktop 5 Slot Housing 9261 Dual T1 NAM DC Power Supply 9265 A1 501 Cables Manuals Rack Mount 5 Slot Housing without bezel and chassis skins 9265 A1 509 9261 Dual T1 NAM DC Power Supply Cables Manuals April 1998 G 1 Equipment List Equipment Feature Number Access Carrier 14 Slot Access Carrier Fan Tray Baffle Universal AC Power 9007 B1 409 Supply Cables Manuals 1xT1 Carrier NAM Spare 9161 Single T1 NAM NAM Manual 9161 B2 902 1xT1 Carrier NAM with I O Cables Manuals 9167 B1 902 2xT1 Carrier NAM Spare 9261 Dual T1 NAM NAM Manual 9261 B2 902 2xT1 Carrier NAM with I O Cables Manuals 9267 B1 902 Access Carrier Parts Access Carrier Baffle Assembly 9007 S1 897 Universal Power Supply Fan Tray 9007 S1 898 Access Carrier Auxiliary Fan Tray 9007 S1 899 T1 NAM Upgrade Kits Software to upgrade 9161 T1 NAM for FXO capability software 9161 F1 658 instructions current FXO feature 9109 F 1 658 Software to upgrade the 9161 Single T1 NAM new NAM I O and 9161 F1 620 manuals Software to upgrade the 9261 Dual T1 NAM new NAM I O and 9261 F 1 620 manuals Hardware and Software Upgrade 9261 Overlay E8 Jumper 2xT1 9261 F1 902 I O Software Cables Manuals Rack Wall Mounting Kits Mounting Brackets for 5 slot
147. block of contiguous channels by specifying the number of DSOs The number of DSOs is limited to the largest contiguous block of timeslots and only starting timeslots that have enough contiguous timeslots following will be selectable ACAMI Assign a block of contiguous channels as in the Block method except that the number of channels assigned is twice the number of DSOs to allocate Every other timeslot is filled with all ones to maintain ones density on the interface 5 Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired slot and port Repeat this step until all desired timeslots are assigned 6 Select Save to save the assignments or press ESC to save and return to the Cross Connect menu April 1998 5 45 Setting Up Assigning OCU DP Data Ports Use the OCU DP Port Assignments screen to view the status of m All DSO assignments on the Network interface m All DSO assignments on the DSX 1 interface You can also use this screen to assign OCU DP data ports to m Network interface timeslots DSX 1 interface timeslots NOTES You can assign OCU DP ports to the DSX 1 interface on the 9161 Single T1 NAM OCU DP port assignments on the Dual DSX APM are not supported gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display Cross Connect OCU DP Port Assignment 2 The OCU DP Port Assignments screen appears Enter one of the following
148. can perform desired tasks B gt Procedure To make a menu selection 1 Tab or press an arrow key to position the cursor on a menu selection Each menu selection is highlighted as you press the key to move the cursor from position to position 2 Press Return The selected menu or screen appears 3 Continue Steps 1 and 2 until you reach the screen you want Refer to the Quick Reference to guide you through menu selections Once you have reached the desired menu or screen select a field to view change or issue a command Select a field from within a menu in the same way you select from a menu press the Tab or right arrow key Example Selecting Control from the Main Menu selecting Administer Logins then entering or changing security information You can enter information into a field in one of several ways Once the field is selected you can Manually type in enter the field value or command Example Entering abc as a user s Login ID on the Administer Logins screen from the Control menu branch Type in enter the first letter s of a field value or command using the character matching feature Example When configuring an FXS voice port s operating mode with the Operating Mode configuration option field selected values FXS FXSDN FXSDN WINK PLAR and DPO entering f or F displays the first value starting with f FXS In this example entering fxsd or FXSD would display FXSDN as the selection
149. ce DRS Slot xx Port n Voice Quiet Slot xx Port n Forced Signal Slot xx Port Pttn Act Network DSX 1 Mon Pttn Network DSX 1 Pttn Act Slot xx Port n sync port Mon Pttn Slot xx Port n sync port Pttn Act Slot xx Port n OCU port Mon Pttn Slot xx Port n OCU port Lamp Test Active Read dsx1LineLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for interface dsx1PayloadLoop from dsx1LoopbackConfig for interface devDS1TestControl and rib test for interface devSyncPortTestControl and acib test for interface devSyncPortTestControl and dtlb test for interface devSyncPortTestControl and pib test for interface devOcuTestControl and oCOCULB test for interface devOcuTestControl and oCOCULB test for interface devOcuTestControl and ocNonLatchingCSULB test for interface devOcuTestControl and ocLatchingCSULB test for interface devOcuTestControl and ocNonLatchingDSULB test for interface devOcuTestControl and ocLatchingCSULB test for interface devOcuTestControl and ocLineLB test for interface devOcuTestControl and ocDataLB test for interface devOcuTestControl and ocDSOLB test for interface devVoiceTestAction and digitalLoopback test for interface devVoiceTestAction and analogLoopback test for interface devVoiceTestAction and ineLoopback test for interface devVoiceTestAction and userDRSTone or networkDRSTone for interface devVoiceTestAction and userQuietTone or networkQuietTone for interface devVoiceTestAction and testRXBits testTXBits testT RLeads
150. circuit 1 Reset the unit and try again 2 Call your service representative for assistance 3 Return the unit to the factory DSXss p T1 Fail The NAM failed to internally loop data on the selected DSX 1 circuit 1 Reset the unit and try again 2 Call your service representative for assistance 3 Return the unit to the factory Memory Fail The unit failed memory verification 1 Reset the unit and try again 2 Call your service representative for assistance 3 Return the unit to the factory Failure xxxxxxxx An internal failure occurred XXXXXXXX represents an eight digit hexadecimal failure code for use by service personnel Record the failure code and contact your service representative Passed No problems were found during power up No action needed no problems were found during power up or reset 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 23 Displaying System Information Test Status Messages 7 24 The right most column of the System and Test Status screen display the tests that are currently active on the card NAM or APM see Table 7 4 Table 7 4 Test Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates No Test Active No tests are currently running Networkn LLB Test Active A network Line Loopback LLB test is active on specified Network interface n DSXss p LLB Test Active A DSX 1 Line Loopback LLB
151. clares an EER if more than 9 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1078 or 1075 or 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1077 10 8 10 5 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC6 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 10 9 1077 10 6 10 5 or 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period April 1998 5 13 Setting Up Configuring the DSX 1 Interface Use the DSX 1 Interface Options screen to configure the DSX 1 interface on the T1 NAM see Table 5 2 Configuration Edit Display DSX 1 NOTE If the DSX 1 interface is disabled Disable appears on the screen No other options are shown If you are using a Dual DSX APM enter the port number of the desired DSX 1 interface in the PORT field For the DSX port on the 9161 Single T1 NAM a 1 is displayed and is read only Table 5 2 DSX 1 Interface Options 1 of 3 Interface Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines if the DSX 1 interface is provided by the port Enable The DSX 1 interface port transmits and receives data Disable The DSX 1 interface port does no
152. condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message April 1998 5 15 Setting Up Table 5 2 DSX 1 Interface Options 3 of 3 Alarm Indication Signal AIS Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when an alarm indication signal condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message Yellow Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an alarm message is generated when a yellow alarm condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message Configuring Ports Configure the following ports on the T1 NAM and any APMs that are installed in your system m Sync Data ports on the T1 NAM or the Sync Data APM m Voice ports on the FXS FXO and E amp M APMs Once you have a port configured you can copy that configuration to other ports of the same type see Copying Port Configurations on page 5 35 Configuring Sync Data Ports 5 16 Use the Synchronous Data Port Options to configure the synchronous data port s on the T1 NAM or on any Sync Data APM associated with the NAM see Table 5 3 Configuration Edit Displa
153. ct String options will only be used when the setting is Other Refer to the Control Characters table on page 5 60 Dial In Access Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether external devices can dial in to the T1 access unit through the communication port based on the Communication Use configuration option setting Enable Answers incoming calls and establishes connection to the remote terminal or IP address Disable Does not answer incoming calls Refer to the Control Characters table on page 5 60 April 1998 5 57 Setting Up 5 58 Table 5 11 External Device COM Port Options 2 of 3 Connect Prefix Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the Connect Prefix to dial the directory telephone number Only used by the T1 access unit when External Device Commands is set to Other ASCII Text Field Changes the Connect Prefix maximum 20 characters Refer to the Control Characters table Clear Clears the connect prefix No connect prefix is used Refer to the Control Characters table on page 5 60 Connect Prefix only appears if External Device Commands is set to Other Connect Indication String Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the connect indication string and determines whether a connection alarms or traps have been dialed out is established through
154. ctivity Timeout is set to Disable 1 60 Sets the time from 1 to 60 minutes 5 62 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up 9161 A2 GH30 30 Table 5 12 Telnet FTP Session Options 2 of 2 FTP Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the T1 access unit responds as a server to an FTP session request from an FTP client on an interconnected IP network Must be enabled when downloading files Enable Allows an FTP session between the T1 access unit and an FTP client Disable Does not allow an FTP session FTP Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password is required for an FTP session If required the login used is the same login used for an async terminal interface session Enable User is prompted for a user ID and password for an FTP session Disable User is not prompted for a user ID and password for an FTP session April 1998 5 63 Setting Up Configuring for Alarms and Traps Use the Alarm options screen see Table 5 13 to control when and how alarm and trap conditions are automatically initiated by the system Configuration Edit Display Alarm Table 5 13 Alarm Options 1 of 3 ASCII Alarm Message Possible Settings Com Port Disable Default Setting Disable Controls the generation and routing of alarm messages to an ASC
155. d Main Menu Control gt Device Name April 1998 8 7 Operation and Maintenance Hot Swapping of APMs The T1 access unit allows you to insert and remove APM cards and their matching I O cards without powering down the unit or interrupting data on the network or on other APMs The T1 access unit automatically recognizes when an APM is inserted or removed and can display the configuration option settings and MIB objects applicable to the APM that was inserted or removed NOTE You do not have access to screens and configuration options that are not valid for the given configuration nor can you preconfigure or predelete a configuration for an APM prior to inserting it in the housing To see configuration options for an inserted APM you must exit the configuration screen then reenter it APM Insertion Insertion of an APM into a housing occurs under one of the following three conditions If the slot previously Then Was unassigned The configuration options for this new APM will be set to factory defaults and will be accessible from the MIB and the async terminal Contained the same type The existing configuration options will be used and will be of APM accessible from the MIB and the async terminal Contained a different type The system will generate a Module Misconfiguration alarm of APM and trap for the selected slot The screens and field choices applicable to this APM will not be displayed until you
156. d the NAM senses that an APM has been inserted or removed and can automatically make the appropriate changes to screens configuration options and MIB objects When an APM is inserted in a previously unassigned slot the T1 access unit configures the APM using the factory default configuration When the same type of APM is inserted into a previously assigned slot the T1 access unit uses the configuration for the APM that previously occupied the slot the APM does not have to be reconfigured When another type of APM is inserted into a previously assigned slot an alarm and trap are generated for the slot If accepted the factory default configuration is loaded for the new APM type if rejected the new APM is ignored and the previous configuration is retained m The NAM can be removed without powering down the unit however all system functionality is lost When a NAM is removed and inserted into another housing it applies the NAM s configurations from the previous housing to the current housing Ifthe NAM is moved from a 2 slot housing to a 5 slot housing the operator can use the configuration of the APM in slot 02 of the previous housing APMs in slots 03 05 will be configured with the factory default settings f the NAM is moved from a 5 slot housing to a 2 slot housing the factory default configuration options are loaded Ifthe NAM is moved from a 2 slot or a 5 slot housing to a 14 slot housing th
157. d the system performs a memory bank switch a reset reinitialization occurs and the system will stay in Minimum mode Reestablish an FTP session to the device Type open P adaress 10 11 12 Type bin to enter binary mode Type cd system to change to the system directory Type put nam3 hi ocd to perform a put to the nam3_hi ocd to start the download If a valid nam3 hi ocd that is it has the revision level as the nam1 ctl ocd and nam2 low ocd files is successfully put and has the proper checksum then the message nam3 hi ocd File Transfer Complete displays the file is loaded into system memory the write permission will be removed for both the nam2 low ocd and the nam3 hi ocd files the system performs a reset reinitialization and the system will be in Normal mode and operating from the new program load The download has successfully completed April 1998 8 11 Operation and Maintenance Backing Up Your Configuration You may choose to back up your configuration files in case recovery is needed The following configuration files correspond to the configuration areas in your T1 access unit Configuration File Configuration Area current cfg Current cust1 cfg Customer 1 cust2 cfg Customer 2 factory cfg Factory 1 You cannot put to this file since it is read only NOTE If you maintain a backup copy of your configuration files you should upload a new backup copy of your configuration fr
158. d open RbTg Ring Lead connected to nominal 48Vdc battery and Tip lead grounded TbRg Tip Lead connected to nominal 48Vdc battery and Ring lead grounded Ring Ringing voltage applied between Tip and Ring Tip and Ring Leads Control State FXO only Loop Tip and Ring are connected together Rgnd Ring lead is attached to ground Open Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip lead or the ground Lpgnd Tip and Ring are connected together and Tip is connected to ground E lead state E amp M APM only On Off M lead state E amp M APM only On Off April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting B gt Procedure To force signaling 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test Voice Port Tests Enter the desired slot and port number Press PgDn to go to page 2 Enter the desired setting for each field ar WOW N Highlight Start under Command in the row to send a test Then press Return to start the test o View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column 7 Highlight Stop under Command to stop the test gt Procedure To monitor signaling 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test Voice Port Tests 2 Enter the desired slot and port number 3 Press PgDn to go to page 2 4 Look at the values displayed under the Monitor Signaling portion of the Screen OCU DP Tests The OCU DP tests run on the OCU
159. d to the external device s DSR lead using a standard EIA 232 crossover cable the communication port s DTR lead is monitored for loss of connection The external device must be configured to drop DSR when a disconnect occurs and to ignore DTR Use the External Device Options screen see Table 5 11 to set up the COM port to support an external device such as a modem or a PAD These options control call processing for an external device Configuration Edit Display User Interface External Device Table 5 11 External Device COM Port Options 1 of 3 External Device Commands Possible Settings Disable AT Other Default Setting Disable Specifies the external device commands to be sent out from the COM port to control the device NOTE The Carrier Detect CD lead detects loss of the external device therefore the external device must not force CD on Disable Commands are not sent out from the communication port NOTE You must use this setting if you have an async terminal connected to the COM port AT AT commands are sent out from the COM port All AT command strings end with a carriage return hex OxOD and a line feed hex 0x0A Other Commands configured by the user are sent out from the COM port CAUTION You must not use this setting if you have an async terminal connected to the COM port NOTE Connect Prefix Connect Indication String Escape Sequence Escape Sequence Delay and Disconne
160. ddaceass ie GOM por NOTE User login ID and password combinations must be defined Refer to Creating a Login on page 6 8 Limit the effective access level to Port Access Level to Level 2 Level 21 or lower Limit the effective access level to Port Access Level to Level 3 Level 31 1 Make sure you have at least one login with Level 1 security set The effective access level of the session is the lower of either the level set to access the port COM port or Telnet or the login access level NOTE See Restoring Access to the User Interface in Chapter 8 Operation and Maintenance should you inadvertently be locked out Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area To save changes select Save and press Return Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the Screen Refer to Chapter 5 Setting Up for more information about Communication Port configuration options 6 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Security Limiting Telnet Access The T1 access unit provides the following methods for limiting access through a Telnet session m Disabling Telnet access completely m Requiring a user login ID and password m Assigning an access level for the port p Procedure To limit access throu
161. e m Aport to port assignment You can also use this screen to assign synchronous data ports to m Network interface timeslots DSX 1 interface timeslots NOTE You can assign sync data ports to the DSX 1 interface on the 9161 Single T1 NAM Sync data port assignments on the Dual DSX APM are not supported m Another synchronous data port NOTE Only one port to port assignment is allowed with a maximum of 24 DSOs for 9161 Single T1 NAM 16 DSOs for 9261 Dual T1 NAM 5 44 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up 9161 A2 GH30 30 B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display Cross Connect Sync Data Port Assignment 2 The Sync Data Port Assignments screen appears Enter one of the following into the Assign To field If you want to assign to Then enter Network interface timeslots Net1 or Net2 DSX 1 interface timeslots on the 9161 DSX01 1 Single T1 NAM Another Sync Data port Port 3 Enter the number of DSOs to allocate 4 Enter one of the following into the Assign By field Enter To Channel Assign ports individually However a Sync Data port can be assigned to multiple timeslots which do not have to be contiguous As you assign multiple timeslots to a port the data port rate increases by the Port Base Rate defined on the Synchronous Data Port Options screen see Configuring Sync Data Ports on page 5 16 Block Assign a
162. e Command SNMP MIB Object STATUS main status system Health amp Status Read Power Supply Alarm devHealthAndStatus dsx1LossOfSignal from dsx1LineStatus for interface dsx1LossOfFrame from dsx1LineStatus for interface dsx1RevAls from dsx1LineStatus for interface dsx1OtherFailure from dsx1LineStatus for interface dsx1RcvFarEnaLOF from dsx1LineStatus for interface devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus devHealthAndStatus down from ifOperStatus for the COM port interface devHealthAndStatus All Self Test Results main status system Self Test Results Read devSelfTestResults 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 D 1 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 2 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main status system Test Status Net DSX 1 LLB Test Active Net DSX 1 PLB Test Active Net DSX 1 RLB Test Active DCLB Slot xx Port n DTLB Slot xx Port n DTPLB Slot xx Port n Non Latching OCU LB ss p Latching OCU LB ss p Non Latching CSU LB ss p Latching CSU LB ss p Non Latching DSU LB ss p Latching DSU LB ss p OCU Line LB ss p OCU Data LB ss p OCU DS 0 LB ss p Voice DLB Slot xx Port n Voice ALB Slot xx Port n Voice LLB Slot xx Port n Voi
163. e Dial Out Directory 5 65 Amphenol plug Amphenol plug 25 pairs Amphenol socket Amphenol plug 25 pairs 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 Analog Loopbacks 9 33 ANSI Performance Report Messages APL 3 4 APM Dual DSX E amp M Voice FXO Voice FXS Voice hot swapping identity information OCU DP removal 8 9 status 7 3 Synchronous Data voice cane E applications channel bank replacement an additions 3 7 direct inward dial off premises extension T1 access unit with high speed data T1 access unit with high speed data amp E amp M 3 3 T1 access unit with high speed data and APL T1 access unit with high speed data and drop amp insert T1 access unit with high speed data and FXS ASCII Alarm Messages assign community names and access levels cross connections 5 36 DSX 1 timeslots 5 39 IP addresses and subnet masks B 7 Network interface timeslots OCU DP ports 5 46 sync data ports 5 44 voice ports async asynchronous terminal interface async terminal limiting access terminal interface direct management control 2 2 audience authentificationFailure trap ASCII Alarm Messages IN 1 Index B Backspace backup configuration Bit Stuffing branches menus C cable 1 Amph plug to 1 Amph plug 1 Amph socket to 1 Amph plug 3 Amph plugs to 1 Amph plug E 15 E 16 3 Amph plugs to 4 Amph plugs COM port COM port to terminal printer C
164. e factory default configuration options are loaded m Multiple User Interfaces Provides multiple means for configuring operating managing and monitoring the unit Menu Driven User Interface Provides an easy to use menu driven interface for configuring and managing the T1 access unit locally or remotely Access to the user interface can be through an async terminal or other VT100 compatible terminal PC emulation modem or a Telnet session LED Light Emitting Diode Monitoring Provides LEDs on the circuit card faceplates that indicate the status of the card s operation m Network Management Capability SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol Management Provides network management via an external SNMP management system using industry standard and Paradyne specific MIB Management Information Base objects 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 1 7 About the T1 Access Mux 1 8 Multiple Management Paths Provides multiple methods for sending receiving management data Embedded Data Link EDL Provides a path for management data over a performance channel between two nodes The performance channel uses 8 Kbps of bandwidth and is embedded in the synchronous data channel If you choose this method you must have a Sync Data port Direct Data Link DDL Provides a path between two nodes over the T1 FT1 link itself embedding the management data in the T1 bundle The management data always uses 1 DSO 64 Kbps
165. e illustration below a LAN adapter can be connected to the COM port to provide Ethernet or Token Ring connectivity or an async terminal or other VT100 compatible interface can be directly connected to the COM port as well Customer Data DCE Router s WAN Link Management Data Physical Connection 2 Cables Customer Data 1 for Management Data 1 or more for Customer Data 496 15182 The configuration options below show what should be configured for a management link These configuration options are configured from the user interface based upon the Port Type selected Asynchronous or Synchronous Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration User Interface Communication Port Port Use Set to Net Link and Port Use Set to Net Link and Port Type Set to Asynchronous Port Type Set to Synchronous Data Rate Kbps Clock Character Length Data Rate Kbps Parity Stop Bits Ignore Control Leads See Table 5 10 Communication Port Options in Chapter 5 Setting Up April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Management and Control When the communication COM port is configured as the IP management link the async terminal interface is accessible through Telnet When this is the case you also need to enable Telnet session configuration options Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration User Interface Telnet FTP Session You must also have an
166. e speed T os Public Network jn S 1 S Ele Remote DSUs 98 1597 Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 User Interface Introduction The T1 access unit uses menu driven asynchronous async terminal interface menus and screens Along with the LED status indicators on the front panel the menu driven interface provides feedback and status on the m 71 access unit m DSX 1 and Network T1 interfaces m Synchronous data ports m Voice ports Async Terminal User Interface Access You can access the user interface m Locally through a direct connection to the communications port via an async terminal or other VT100 compatible terminal or PC emulation m Remotely through a Telnet session although only one user interface session may be active at one time Network Management Manage the T1 access unit via an SNMP management system connected to the communications port or through a remote in band connection Menu Hierarchy The menu hierarchy represents the organization of the system s menus and screens Refer to the enclosed Quick Reference for a pictorial view of the menu hierarchy 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 4 1 User Interface Main Menu Screen Access to all of the T1 access unit s tasks begins at the Main Menu screen which has four menus or branches The login s access level appears at the top of the screen unless no security
167. eached An attempt to enter a new login ID exceeds the six login password combinations limit 1 Delete another login password combination 2 Reenter the new login ID Minimum Mode Appears if the T1 access unit fails the memory test during a power up self test Use FTP to download software again Call your Service representative No Security Records to Delete Delete was selected from the Administer Login screen and no security records exist 1 No action needed 2 Enter a security record Password Matching Error Re enter Password Password entered in the Reenter Password field of the Administer Logins screen does not match what was entered in the Password field 1 Try again 2 Contact your system administrator to verify your password xis the character not being accepted April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Automatic Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs You can control whether generated alarm messages will initiate a call if a connection on the COM port external device has not already been established To dial out when an alarm occurs you must m Connect the modem to the COM port using the appropriate cable m Select the ASCII alarms to receive for each interface m Configure the phone directory to use for Dial Out Alarms m Enable Alarm amp Trap Dial Out m Enable Call Retry if desired p Procedure To enable the desired ASCII alarms for e
168. ead 7 R Port 3 P4 19 R Port 19 Transmit Ring 8 R1 Port 3 P5 19 R1 Port 19 Receive Ring 9 M Port 3 P6 19 M Port 19 M Lead 10 R Port 4 P4 20 R Port 20 Transmit Ring 11 R1 Port 4 P5 20 R1 Port 20 Receive Ring 12 M Port 4 P6 20 M Port 20 M Lead 13 R Port 5 P4 21 R Port 21 Transmit Ring 14 R1 Port 5 P5 21 R1 Port 21 Receive Ring 15 M Port 5 P6 21 M Port 21 M Lead 16 R Port 6 P4 22 T Port 22 Transmit Ring 17 R1 Port 6 P5 22 R1 Port 22 Receive Ring 18 M Port 6 P6 22 M Port 22 M Lead 19 R Port 7 P4 23 R Port 23 Transmit Ring 20 R1 Port 7 P5 23 R1 Port 23 Receive Ring 21 M Port 7 P6 23 M Port 23 M Lead 22 R Port 8 P4 24 R Port 24 Transmit Ring 23 R1 Port 8 P5 24 R1 Port 24 Receive Ring 24 M Port 8 P6 25 M Port 24 M Lead 25 SG P7 17 24 SG Signal Ground Ports 1 8 Port 17 24 April 1998 E 23 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments 3 Amphenol Plugs to 4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P3 2 of 2 P3 Pin Designation Connects To Pin Designation Function 26 T Port 1 P4 42 T Port 17 Transmit Tip 27 T1 Port 1 P5 42 T1 Port 17 Receive Tip 28 E Port 1 P6 42 E Port 17 E Lead 29 T Port 2 P4 43 T Port 18 Transmit Tip 30 T1 Port 2 P5 43 T1 Port 18 Receive Tip 31 E Port 2 P6 43 E Port 18 E Lead 32 T Port 3 P4 44 T Port 19 T
169. ead state Send All Ones on Data Port Not Ready configuration option on the Main Menu Configuration Sync Data Ports branch The OOF and EER alarm condition will only generate a linkUp linkDown trap if the EDL is enabled on that port Embedded Data Link configuration option on the Main Menu Configuration Sync Data Ports branch 3 xxxxxx is the failure code April 1998 C 3 SNMP Traps Traps Enterprise Specific These traps indicate that an enterprise specific event has occurred Supported enterprise specific traps include the following listed in alphabetical order Trap What It Indicates Possible Cause enterpriseAPMFailed 9 The APM cannot be detected The APM has failed or has been removed enterpriseAPMFailedClear 109 The APM failure has cleared The APM failure has cleared enterpriseConfigChange 6 Configuration has been changed via the user interface or an SNMP Manager after 60 seconds has elapsed without another change Configuration has been changed via the user interface or an SNMP Manager enterpriseDeviceFail 3 An internal device failure Operating software has detected an internal device failure enterpriseModuleMisConfig 8 A module misconfiguration has been detected An APM is installed in a slot that previously contained another type of APM enterpriseModuleMisConfigClear 108 A module misconfiguration error condition has been cleared
170. ects in the MIB for the NAM when using the Community Name 1 configuration option This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access to the objects in the MIB for the NAM when using the Community Name 1 configuration option Allows access for all objects specified as read write in the MIB RFCs However access for all read only objects is specified as read only 5 70 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 15 General SNMP Management Options 2 of 2 Community Name 2 Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting blank Specifies the second of two names that are allowed to access the objects in the unit s Management Information Base MIB The community name must be supplied by an external SNMP manager whenever the manager tries to access an object in the MIB ASCII Text Field Add or change the community 2 name maximum 255 characters Clear Clears the Community Name 2 field Name 2 Access Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the type of access allowed for Community Name 2 This is the type of access allowed for external SNMP managers accessing objects in the MIB using the Community Name 2 configuration option Read Allows read only access to the objects in the MIB for the NAM when using the Community Name 2 configuration option This includes all objects spec
171. ed in AT amp T Technical Reference TR 54016 What Statistics Can Be Collected 7 12 You can collect the following metrics m Errored Seconds ES Any second with one or more ESF Error events m Unavailable Seconds UAS Any second in which service is unavailable m Severely Errored Seconds SES Any second with 320 or more CRC errors or one or more Out Of Frame OOF events m Bursty Errored Seconds BES Any second with more than one but less than 320 CRC errors m Controlled Slip Seconds CSS Any second with one or more controlled slips a replication or deletion of a DS1 frame by the receiving device This is collected for network performance statistics only April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying System Information Loss of Frame Count LOFC The number of Loss of Frame conditions Complete Indicates whether or not the 15 minutes worth of far end statistics contain 900 seconds worth of statistics Bad T1 network conditions or a loopback test can prevent far end statistics from reaching the T1 access unit If one or more seconds of far end performance statistics are missing then this field displays No Otherwise Yes is displayed This field appears on the Sync Data Performance Statistics screen only Network Performance Statistics For the network performance statistics these metrics are kept for each 15 minute interval over the past 24 hour period A Telco set and a user set are kept for each
172. ed with the E amp M FXO and FXS Voice APMs must be set to ensure that The absolute signal power of the encoded analog signals other than live voice and network control signaling will not exceed 12 dBm when averaged over any 3 second interval For network control signals such as DTMF the level will not exceed 3 dBm The E amp M FXO and FXS voice lines are to be connected to locally attached equipment only Under no circumstances should voice lines be used on exposed outside plant lines After the telephone company has installed the requested service and jack you can connect the equipment to the network An FCC compliant telephone cord and modular plug are provided with this equipment This equipment is designed to be connected to the telephone network or premises wiring using a compatible modular jack that is Part 68 compliant Canada Notice to Users of the Canadian Telephone Network The Industry Canada label identifies certified equipment This certification means that the equipment meets telecommunications network protective operational and safety requirements as prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment Technical Requirements document s The Department does not guarantee the equipment will operate to the user s satisfaction Before installing this equipment users should ensure that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities of the local telecommunications company The equipment must also be installed
173. el bank is a dumb device and therefore cannot be managed from a remote site while the T1 access unit can be managed via SNMP Public Switched T1 Access Unit with E amp M and Telephone Network 4 Wire FXS APMs E amp M Circuits PBX f ona Switch FXS Circuits to Dial Modems 97 15194 01 Channel Bank Replacement April 1998 3 7 Applications Off Premises Extension OPX The configuration shown in the following diagram permits a branch location to access the PBX line as if it were locally connected Likewise the branch office phones appear as if they are locally connected A call between the two sites does not result in any long distance charges Branch Office Headquarters Router Line TE PBX Ld Lt Mainframe x11 Bx119 X112 97 15672 Off Premises Extension Direct Inward Dial DID The configuration shown in the following diagram allows an incoming call to dial to an extension from the PBX without going through the main switchboard T1 Access DID Lines Unit Central Office Kee CO EZ i T1 Facility PBX 2 97 15673 Direct Inward Dial 3 8 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Applications Video Conferencing 9161 A2 GH30 30 The OCU DP APM supports Switched 56 video as shown in the following example Here an external video codec is connected to OCU DP ports using exter
174. en Manual Dialing Out When an Alarm Occurs Configure the external device connected the the access unit s COM port Then use the COM Port Call Setup screen to Select the desired telephone number m Dial a call m Disconnect a call p Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Control COM Port Call Setup 2 Enter the desired directory number or press the spacebar to cycle through the numbers that have been set up in the directory The telephone number appears in the Directory Phone Number field See Displaying Directory Numbers and Changing Directory Numbers in Chapter 8 Operation and Maintenance for information about the call directory 3 Select Dial and press the Enter key to initiate dialing 4 To end the call select Disconnect and press the Enter key 9 20 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Tests Available 9161 A2 GH30 30 The Test menu allows you to run loopbacks and test patterns on the T1 access unit and to test the front panel LEDs It is available to users with a security access level of 1 or 2 Use the test menu to access the following tests To access the Select Network 1 or 2 Interface tests Line Loopback Payload Loopback Repeater Loopback Remote Line Loopback Pattern Tests QRSS All zeroes All ones 1 in 8 3 in 24 63 511 2047 215 1 220 1 user defined Network Tests DSX 1 Interface tests Line Loopback Payload Loopb
175. ence to display the Tests screen Main Menu gt Test Sync Data Port Tests Select the desired slot and port numbers Select the desired pattern in the Send field If you are sending monitoring a user defined pattern enter the the desired 2 byte hexadecimal value in the field next to Send When sending a pattern the Inject ERR function key appears Use Inject ERR if you want to inject a bit error in the transmitted bit pattern Highlight Send under Command in the row to send a pattern or Start to monitor a pattern Then press Return to start the test View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column An error count is also displayed When monitoring a pattern the ResetMon virtual function key appears ResetMon resets the error count to zero Highlight Stop under Command in the Send or Monitor row Then press Return to stop the test Voice port tests are available to run on voice ports for any installed and enabled APM p Procedure To 1 start and stop a voice port loopback Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test Voice Port Tests Enter the desired slot and port number Highlight Start under Command in the row to send a test Then press Return to start the test View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column Highlight Stop under Command to stop the test April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Digital Loopbacks Analog
176. ephone number contained in the Alarm directory and the alternate dial out directory is used to try another telephone number 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the communication port IP address which you can view or edit The first digit i e xxx 255 255 255 cannot be 0 or 127 or greater than 223 However 000 is valid representing a null address Clear Clears the alternate IP address for the communication port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Alternate Communication Port Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the alternate subnet mask needed for the communication port The alternate subnet mask is used when a call attempt does not complete on the primary alarm trap telephone number contained in the Alarm directory and the alternate dial out directory is used to try another telephone number 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 View or edit the alternate subnet mask for the node Clear Clears the alternate subnet mask for the communication port and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the alternate subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 April 1998 5 69 Setting Up Setting Up for SNMP Management Use the General SNMP
177. equent sessions Enable Disconnects user session after the specified time of inactivity Disable Does not disconnect user session Disconnect Time Minutes Possible Settings 1 60 Default Setting 5 Determines the amount of lapsed time before disconnecting a user session in minutes Disconnect Time Minutes does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms nactivity Time is set to Disable 1 60 Set the time from 1 to 60 minutes April 1998 5 55 Setting Up Table 5 10 Communication Port Options 5 of 5 RIP Possible Settings None Proprietary Default Setting None Specifies which routing information protocol RIP is used to enable routing of management between devices RIP only appears if Port Use is set to Net Link NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subsequent sessions None No routing is used Use this setting when the device at the other end of the management link is not a Paradyne device Proprietary A proprietary variant of RIP version 1 is used to communicate routing information between devices to enable routing of IP traffic 5 56 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Setting Up the Communication Port to Support an External Device 9161 A2 GH30 30 NOTE To detect when the external device connection has been lost the communication port s DTR lead should be connecte
178. er Supply Installation Instructions 5 Slot Housing and FrameSaver 9000 Series Access Carrier AC Power Supply Installation Instructions 2 Slot Power Supply Installation Instructions DC Power Supply for 5 Slot Housing Installation Instructions 5 Slot Housing with DC Power Supply Installation Instructions 9000 Series Access Carrier Installation Instructions Affidavit Requirements for Connection to Digital Service 9109 Sync Data Application Module APM Installation Instructions 9109 E amp M Analog Voice Application Module APM Installation Instructions 9109 FXS Analog Voice Application Module APM Installation Instructions 9109 Dual DSX Application Module APM Installation Instructions 9109 FXO Analog Voice Application Module APM Installation Instructions 9109 OCU DP Application Module APM Installation Instructions 916x T1 Access Mux Software Release 1 to Release 2 Upgrade Instructions 9161 9261 T1 Network Access Module NAM Upgrade Instructions 916x 926x T1 Access Mux Quick Reference 9161 Single T1 Network Access Module NAM Installation Instructions 9261 Dual T1 Network Access Module NAM Installation Instructions 9161 Single T1 Network Access Module NAM to 9261 Dual T1 NAM Upgrade Instructions Contact your sales or service representative to order additional product documentation Paradyne documents are also available on the World Wide Web at http www paradyne com Select Service amp Suppo
179. erating Modes E amp M FXO FXS E amp M Transmit Only DPT FXO FXO DN FXO DN Wink DPO FXS FXS DN FXS DN Wink PLAR 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 F 5 Technical Specifications F 6 Specification Criteria Signaling Types E amp M Type Type Il Type IV Type V FXO Loop Start Loop Start Forward Disconnect Ground Start FXS Loop Start Loop Start Forward Disconnect Ground Start Ground Start Immediate Ground Start Automatic PLAR D3 PLAR D4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Technical Specifications Specification Criteria OCU DP APM Weight 2 port OCU DP APM 6 port OCU DP APM OCU DP 1 O card 0 800 Ibs 362 kg 1 052 Ibs 477 kg 0 286 Ibs 130 kg Size OCU DP APM OCU DP I O card 11 58 x 8 00 29 41 cm x 20 32 cm 2 90 x 10 15 7 37 cm x 25 78 cm Physical Environment Operating temperature Storage temperature Relative humidity Shock and vibration 35 F to 122 F 1 7 C to 50 C 4 F to 158 F 20 C to 70 C 5 to 85 noncondensing Withstands normal shipping and handling Power Consumption max 2 Port OCU 2 78 watts 0 232 amps input current at 12 volts 6 Port OCU 5 04 watts 0 420 amps input current at 12 volts DDS Ports Standards AT amp T PUB 62310 Bellcore TA TSY 00077 ANSI 71 410 AT amp T PUB 61330 AT amp T TR41458 Rates 56 kbps 64 kbps Clear Channel 4 wire Sw
180. erface time slot 01 to 24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates the blank Time slot is unassigned SssPp Voice or sync data port p of slot ss is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 Netnyy Network Interface n 1 or 2 time slot yy is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Clear Channel Netnyyr Network Interface n 1 or 2 time slot yy is assigned to DSX 1 time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r RsvdAPM Time slot is assigned to an APM which is either m failed m removed or not installed or has been replaced by an APM type that is not compatible with the configuration 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 9 Displaying System Information 7 10 Slot Assignment information NAM or APM physical slot assignment information appears below the DSX 1 interface time slot fields The following information is available for viewing Physical Slot Identifies the assigned card type 01 to 14 based on model T1 NAM T1 NAM Empty The slot is empty 02 to 05 based on model Sync Data 4 port synchronous data APM DSX 1 2 port Dual DSX APM E amp M Voice 8 port E amp M Voice APM FXO Voice 8 port FXO Voice APM FXS Voice 8 port FXS Voice APM OCU 2 2 port OCU DP APM OCU 6 6 port OCU DP APM Empty The slot is empty Misconfig The slot contains a misconfigured APM Unsupport T
181. ess configuration option 1 10 Specifies the number of managers allowed to send SNMP messages NMS n IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address that identifies the SNMP manager s authorized to send SNMP messages If an SNMP message is received from the NMS whose IP address does not match an address contained in this field access is denied and an authenticationFailure trap is generated If a match is found the type of access read only or read write is determined by the corresponding access level 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Adds or changes the NMS IP address The first digit i e xxx 255 255 255 cannot be 127 127 is a reserved number Clear Clears the NMS IP address and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 5 72 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 16 SNMP NMS Security Options 2 of 2 Access Level Possible Settings Read Read Write Default Setting Read Specifies the access allowed for an authorized NMS when IP address validation is performed If the IP address for the NMS sending an SNMP message is on the list of allowed managers this configuration option determines the type of access allowed for that manager Read Read only access to the objects in the MIB for the T1 access unit This includes all objects specified as either read only or read write in
182. essages 2 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Priority month day year LOS condition 1 Check the cable to 2 Net hours minutes seconds detected the Network DSX 1 3 DSX 1 Continuous Loss Of Signal interface LOS condition detected at the Network 1 Network 2 2 Contact network Interface or at DSX 1 provider Interface in slot ss port p month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Loss Of Signal LOS condition at the Network 1 Network 2 Interface or at the DSX 1 Interface in slot ss port p month day year An out of frame 1 Ensure that the line 4 Net hours minutes seconds condition is detected framing format 5 DSX 1 Continuous Out Of Frame at the specified configuration option OOF detected at the Network or DSX 1 setting matches the Network 1 Network 2 interface setting of the Interface or at DSX 1 equipment DSX 1 Interface in slot ss port p or network Net 2 Contact network provider month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Out of Frame OOF condition at the Network 1 Network 2 Interface or at the DSX 1 Interface in slot ss port p month day year A continuous 1 Ensure that EDLis 13 hours minutes seconds Continuous Out of Frame OOF condition at synchronous data port in slot ss port p month day year hours minutes seconds Alarm Cleared for Out O
183. estControl for mon2E20 on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon2E20 to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for monUserDefined on the interface and devDS1TestArgument to the 2 byte pattern value devDS1TestControl for monUserDefined to idle on the interface devDS1SendControllnjectErr to inject devDS1MonResultErrorCount to clear Read value in devDS1MonResultErrorCount devDS1SendControlErrorCount D 8 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 9 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main test port sync data Set Start DTE Loopback Stop DTE Loopback devSyncPortTestControl for dt b on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for atlb to idle on the interface Start DTE Payload Loopback Stop DTE Payload Loopback devSyncPortTestControl for p b on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for plb to idle on the interface Start Data Channel Loopback Stop Data Channel Loopback devSyncPortTestControl for dc b on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for dcib to idle on the interface Send V 54 Loopback Up Send V 54 Loopback Down devSyncPortTestControl to v54dn on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for v54dn to idle on the interface Send FT1 Loopback Up Send FT1 Loopback Down devSyncPortTestControl for ftlup on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for ftiup to idle on the interface Start Send QRSS Pattern Stop Send QRS
184. etc from the alarm or SNMP trap to the COM port s external device is retried using an alternate telephone number Attempts the call up to 5 times per alarm or SNMP trap message None Alternate alarm dial out is not performed 1 5 Specifies the call directory containing the telephone number to call in the event that a call cannot be completed to the phone number contained in the Alarm directory 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 65 Setting Up Table 5 13 Alarm Options 3 of 3 System Alarm Relay Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether an alarm condition for the T1 access unit will activate the system alarm relay The alarm relay is deactivated when the condition causing the alarm is corrected If more than one alarm condition is present the alarm relay remains active until all alarm conditions are cleared for that T1 access unit You can also deactivate an alarm via the System Alarm Relay Cut Off selection from the Control menu System Alarm Relay only appears if the NAM is installed in a 5 slot housing or access carrier Alarm conditions are Power supply fan tray alarm Continuous Loss of Signal LOS condition at either the Network or DSX 1 interface or on any OCU DP port Continuous Out of Frame OOF condition at either the Network or DSX 1 interface Yellow alarm on either the Network or DSX 1 interface Continuous Out of Frame OOF conditi
185. ether and are connected to ground April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying System Information View this field To find the For the FXO Voice APM Cont d T R Receive Status of what the attached device is doing with the Tip and Ring leads of the FXO port RbTo Attached device has battery applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is opened RbTg Attached device has battery applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded TbRg Attached device has battery applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded Ring Attached device is applying Ringing voltage between Tip and Ring ToRo Attached device has both Tip and Ring leads open TgRo Attached device has the Tip lead grounded and the Ring lead open TgR Attached device has the Tip lead grounded and the Ring lead state is unknown ToR Attached device has the Tip lead open and the Ring lead state is unknown RoT Attached device has the Ring lead open and the Tip lead state is unknown Trunk Cond CGA Displays the status of trunk conditioning On during CGA Off for no CGA April 1998 7 5 Displaying System Information 7 6 View this field To find the For the FXS Voice APM Port Status Status of the port Assigned To Interface the port is assigned to Operating Mode Operating mode of the voice port that was configured usin
186. ether an ASCII alarm message is generated when a Secondary Clock Failure is detected Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 51 Setting Up Setting User Interface Options Use the User Interface options to set up m The Communication Port m Support an external device connected to the Communication Port m Support a Telnet or FTP session through an interconnected IP network Setting Up the Communication Port 5 52 Use the Communication Port Options screen see Table 5 10 to configure the COM port for one of the following functions m ASCII terminal interface m Network communication link to an IP network or IP device m Alarm port for sending ASCII alarm messages This screen differs depending upon whether the COM port is configured for synchronous or asynchronous operation Configuration Edit Display User Interface Communication Port Options Table 5 10 Communication Port Options 1 of 5 Port Use Possible Settings Terminal Net Link Alarm Default Setting Terminal Assigns a specific use to the communication COM port Terminal The COM port is the asynchronous terminal interface port NOTES ASCII alarm messages may also be supported when the asynchronous terminal interface is not in use f the Default Network Destination is set to COM see Table 5 14 and you change Port Use to Terminal
187. ether an alarm is generated when an excessive error rate condition is detected on the synchronous data port Excessive Error Rate does not appear if Embedded Data Link is set to Disable Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface Options screen see Table 5 1 Enable Generates an alarm Disable Does not generate an alarm Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an excessive error rate EER condition is declared for a synchronous data port The EER is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC5 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Excessive Error Rate Threshold does not appear if Excessive Error Rate is set to Disable Embedded Data Link is set to Disable Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface Options screen see Table 5 1 Both Near End and Far End Performance Statistics are set to Disable 10E 4 Declares an EER if more than 1 535 CRC5 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more tha
188. evice must provide a clock 8 kbps less than the expected data port rate For example if 64 kbps is the selected port rate the external clock source should supply a 56 kbps clock signal Port for Secondary Clock Source Possible Settings SssPp Default Setting the first available port Selects a slot and a port number for the Secondary Clock Source Port only appears if Secondary Clock Source is set to Sync Data or External SssPp Where ss is the slot number and p is the port number for the Secondary Clock Source April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 9 System Options 4 of 4 External Clock Rate KHz Possible Settings 8 1544 2048 Default Setting 1544 Determines the clock rate when a clock source is configured for an external clock in kilohertz External Clock Rate only appears if Primary or Secondary Clock Source is set to External 8 The external clock rate is 8 KHz 1544 The external clock rate is 1544 KHz 2048 The external clock rate is 2048 KHz Primary Clock Failure Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies whether an ASCII alarm message is generated when a Primary Clock Failure is detected Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message Secondary Clock Failure Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies wh
189. f Frame OOF condition at synchronous data port in slot ss port p out of frame condition occurred on the synchronous data port for the identified slot and port Alarm condition no longer exists enabled on the far end port Refer to the Technical Reference for setting configuration options 2 There is a network problem with the fractional portion of the link carrying this port s data Contact network provider No action needed April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting 9161 A2 GH30 30 Table 9 1 ASCII Alarm Messages 3 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Priority month day year A DDS network failure Contact the DDS 19 hours minutes seconds is being detected on service provider A DDS Network Failure the specified OCU DP code has been received at port OCU DP port in slot ss port p month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for a DDS Network Failure code at OCU DP port in slot ss port p month day year An Excessive Error Contact network 12 hours minutes seconds Rate condition is provider An Excessive Error Rate detected on the EER has been detected at network interface the Network 1 Network 2 Interface month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Excessive Error Rate EER at the Network 1 Network 2
190. figuration options Only an enabled port can be selected This selection only appears if at least one synchronous data port is enabled NOTE If an EDL for the port is enabled the external device must provide a clock 8 kbps less than the expected data port rate For example if 64 kbps is the selected port rate the external clock source should supply a 56 kbps clock signal Port for Primary Clock Source Possible Settings SssPp Default Setting the first available port Selects a slot and a port number for the Primary Clock Source Port only appears if Primary Clock Source is set to Sync Data or External SssPp Where ss is the slot number and p is the port number for the Primary Clock Source 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 49 Setting Up 5 50 Table 5 9 System Options 3 of 4 Secondary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 Net2 DSXss p Internal External Sync Data Default Setting Internal Provides a secondary clock source when the primary clock source fails The source selected for this configuration option provides all of the timing within the unit and the clocks for all of the external interfaces Only one APM clock source can be selected as the clock source for either primary or secondary clock The clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds If the secondary clock source fails the clock source will switch to internal T
191. g tests are the only tests allowed to run at the same time as a Data Loopback No other tests can be running when a Data Loopback test is initiated m Line Loopback on the cross connected T1 interface m Payload Loopback on the cross connected T1 interface OCU DP Remote Loopback Tests The following remote loopback tests are available for the OCU DP APM m Latching Loopback applicable only to the 64 Clear Channel DDS 64KCC rate m Nonlatching Loopback applicable only to the DDS rates of 56K and Switched 56 Device Tests The T1 access unit supports a Lamp test at the device level Use this test to determine whether all LEDs are lighting and functioning properly All LEDs light at the same time every 1 2 seconds during execution of the Lamp test When you stop the Lamp test the LEDs are restored to their normal condition If the Test Timeout configuration option is enabled and a Test Duration is set the Lamp test stops when the test duration expires The Lamp test is not disruptive to data 9 42 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Test Timeout A Test Timeout feature is available to automatically terminate a test as opposed to manually terminating a test after it has been running a specified period of time To use this feature enable the Test Timeout configuration option under the System Options branch of the menu tree and set a duration for the test to run in the Test Duration min configuration option see
192. g the Operating Mode configuration option on the Voice Ports screen See the Technical Reference for configuration information Signaling Type Type of signaling used by the voice port that was configured using the Signaling Type configuration option on the Voice Ports screen See the Technical Reference for configuration information Call Progress Current condition of the port TX ABCD bits Current value of the ABCD signaling bits that are being transmitted to the T1 interface RX ABCD bits Current value of the ABCD signaling bits that are being received from the T1 interface T R Control Current status of the tip and ring leads RbTo A 48 Vdc battery is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is opened RbTg A 48 Vdc battery is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded TbRg A 48 Vdc battery is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded Ring Ringing voltage is applied between Tip and Ring T R Receive Status of what the attached device is doing with the Tip and Ring leads of the FXS port Loop Tip and Ring are connected together Rgnd Ring lead is grounded by attached device Open Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip lead or the ground Trunk Cond CGA Displays the status of trunk conditioning On for CGA Off for no CGA April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying System Information Displaying Cross Connect Status Slot assignmen
193. gh a Telnet Session 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 3 Follow this menu selection sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display User Interface Telnet FTP Session The Telnet FTP Session Options screen appears 4 Select and set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Disable Telnet Telnet Session to Disable Require a user s login ID and Telnet Login Required to Enable password NOTE User login ID and password combinations must be defined Refer to Creating a Login on page 6 8 Assign an access level for all Telnet Session Access Level to Level 1 Level 2 sessions or Level 3 5 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 To save changes select Save and press Return 7 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the Screen 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 6 3 Security Controlling External Device Access The T1 access unit allows you to control whether dial in access for an external device
194. has been set up Menu branches are filtered based on effective security level which is the lower of the Session Access Level Telnet FTP Session options and the Login ID access level Administer Logins under the Control branch Select To Security Level Status View diagnostic tests voice interfaces cross 1 2 3 connections statistics and T1 access unit identity information Test Select monitor and cancel test for the system s 1 2 interfaces Configuration Display and edit the configuration options 1 2 3 Control Control the user interface for call setup device 1 naming date and time login administration and system alarm relay cut off for the 5 slot housing Also initiate a power on reset of the system Screen Field Types Three types of screen fields are available on the async terminal Use screen field To Menu selection Display a list of available functions for user selection Input Add or change information on a screen or edit field Underlines in the field value or selection indicate an input Display performance and system specific tests display only field Display configuration information and results from No underlines in the field value or selection indicate a 4 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 User Interface What Affects Screen Displays What appears on the screens depends on m Current configuration How you
195. he Login ID ID of 1 to 10 characters Password Password from 1 to 10 characters Re enter Password Password again to verify that you entered the correct password into the device Access Level Access level 1 2 or 3 5 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 To save login information select Save and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen The cursor is repositioned at the Login ID field ready for another entry Refer to Chapter 5 Setting Up for more information about security and login configuration options Deleting a Login A login record can be deleted NOTE To change a login delete the current login and create a new one p Procedure To delete a login record 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Control Admin Login 2 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 3 Select PgUp or PgDn and press Return to page through login pages records until you find the one to be deleted 4 Once the correct record is displayed select Delete and press Return 5 To save the deletion select Save and press Return When the deletion is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the screen The number of login pages records reflects one less record and the record following the deleted record appears Example Page 2 of 4 is changed to Page 2 of 3 9161
196. he external device COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position Modular Plug No Tx Clock Connection Rx Data Modem DB25 Plug Tx Data Signal Ground Signal Ground Tx Data Rx Data DTR CD DSR RTS Rx Clock No Connection RTS DTR CTS Gender Adapter Changer 97 15669 When connecting the COM port to a router or Frame Relay Assembler Disassembler FRAD a gender adapter is required to convert the COM Port to Terminal Printer cable s plug type interface to a socket type interface for the AUX port 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 E 3 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments LAN Adapter and Cables T1 Network Interface Cable E 4 The LAN adapter is ordered along with the appropriate cable Be sure to specify whether you need a Token Ring or an Ethernet LAN Adapter The following shows the pin assignments for the cable between the LAN Adapter LAN A and the T1 access unit s COM port or COM Port to PC Adapter DCE COM LANA DTE Port Tx Clock 1 1 Unused Rx Data 2 2 DTR Signal Ground 3 3 Tx Data Tx Data 4 4 4 Signal Ground DTR 5 lt gt 5 Rx Data CD 6 6 CTS RTS 7 F 7 Frame Ground Rx Clock 8 8 Unused 496 14908 Network access is via a 14 foot cable with an RJ48C unkeyed plug type connector on each end The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each
197. he SNMP manager s authorized to send IP address SNMP messages to the access unit Specify the access allowed for an Access Type to Read or Read Write authorized NMS when IP address validates is performed 5 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 To save changes select Save and press Return 7 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Refer to Setting Up for SNMP Management in Chapter 5 Setting Up for more information about SNMP configuration options Creating a Login A login ID and password is required if security is enabled You can define up to six logins login ID password combinations Each login must be unique and have a specified access level B gt Procedure To create a login 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Control Admin Login 2 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 3 Select New and press Return 4 Enter login ID password and security level information Security is enabled by the configuration options Login Required for the Communication Port and Telnet Login Required or FTP Login Required for a Telnet FTP Session 6 8 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Security In the field Enter t
198. he clock source will switch back to primary when the primary clock source returns and is stable for 10 seconds NOTE Forthe Primary and Secondary Clock Source options only Sync Data and Internal can be selected for both options All other selections must have different settings e g if Primary Clock Source is set to Net1 Secondary Clock Source cannot be set to Net1 Net1 The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the Network 1 T1 interface Net2 The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the Network 2 T1 interface DSXss p The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the DSX 1 interface where ss is the slot number and p is the port number This selection is only available if a DSX 1 interface is enabled Internal The secondary clock for the unit is the internal clock External The secondary clock for the unit is the external clock XTXC provided through one of the synchronous data ports specified in the Port configuration option Only a disabled port can be selected and the port cannot be used for data This selection only appears if at least one synchronous data port is disabled Sync Data The secondary clock for the unit is derived from the XTXC signal of a synchronous data port specified in the Port configuration options Only an enabled port can be selected This selection only appears if at least one synchronous data port is enabled NOTE If an EDL for the port is enabled the external d
199. he idle state for a PLAR D4 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR4idle PLAR4busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D4 interface ABCD 0000 PLAR4busy DPO idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPO interface ABCD 0000 DPT idle DPO busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPO interface ABCD 1111 DPT busy DPT idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a DPT interface ABCD 0000 DPO idle DPT busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for a DPT interface ABCD 1111 DPO busy USER xxxx The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent a user defined pattern of ABCD xxxx USER xxxx 1 xxxx is the same value on both the Network and the DSX 1 sides April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Assigning Network 2 Timeslots to Network 1 Interface Timeslots If you are using a 9261 Dual T1 NAM you can assign Network 2 interface timeslots to Network 1 interface timeslots B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edi
200. he interface selected in the Network field is available for use Interface Status is read only if Network is set to 1 first interface on the 9261 Dual T1 NAM or the interface on the 9161 Single T1 NAM Enable The interface is available Disable The interface is not available for use When the interface is disabled any existing cross connect assignments for this interface will be cleared no alarms or traps for this interface will be generated no configuration options will be displayed and all LEDs associated with this interface will remain off If you attempt to disable the Network 2 interface for which cross connections exist the message This action will clear all Network n Cross Connections Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Yes The following occurs All existing cross connect assignments for this interface are cleared Alarms or traps associated with this interface are not generated LEDs associated with this interface are held in an off state Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the T1 network interface D4 Uses D4 framing format ESF Uses Extended Superframe ESF framing format 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 7 Setting Up Table 5 1 Network Interface Options 2 of 7 Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Set
201. he slot contains an unrecognized APM Failed The slot contained an APM that has been removed or is no longer operational April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying Port Assignments Displaying System Information Use the Port Assignments Display screen to display port assignment information for each voice and data port on the NAM and APMs Use the following menu sequence to display port assignment information Main Menu gt Status Cross Connect Status Port Assignment Display The following information is available for viewing View this field To find the Slot Slot number Type Type of NAM or APM occupying the slot Possible values are T1 NAM T1 NAM Sync Data 4 port synchronous data APM DSX 1 2 port DSX APM E amp M Voice 8 port E amp M APM FXO Voice 8 port FXO Voice APM FXS Voice 8 port FXS Voice APM OCU 2 2 port OCU DP APM OCU 6 6 port OCU DP APM Empty The slot is empty Misconfig The slot contains a misconfigured APM Unsupport The slot contains an unrecognized APM Failed The slot contained an APM that has been removed or is no longer operational Assignment Port assignment Possible values are Blank slot is empty or port does not exist on the NAM or the APM Disable The port is disabled Unassgn The port is unassigned Netn The port is assigned to the Network Interface 1
202. hich tests are currently active Health and Status Messages These messages appear in the first column of the System and Test Status screen in priority highest to lowest order as shown in Table 7 2 Clear device failure messages from the System Health and Status screen using the following menu selection sequence Main Menu Control gt Clear Device Fail 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 17 Displaying System Information Table 7 2 Health and Status Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do System Operational This message appears when No action needed there are no status messages to report Power Supply Alarm A power supply or fan tray 1 Check that the power problem is detected on the supply or fan tray is System mounted correctly in the housing 2 Contact your service representative LOS at Networkn A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on Network Interface 1 or 2 Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to 12 5 1 Network cable problem 1 Check that the network cable is securely attached at both ends 2 No signal is being 2 Check far end T1 access transmitted at the far end unit status T1 access unit 3 T1 facility problem 3 Contact your network provider LOS at DSXss p A Loss of Signal LOS condition is detected on the DSX 1 interface in slot ss port p Clears when the ratio of ones to zeros received is greater than or equal to
203. ice Ports OCU DP Copy Ports Cross Connect System Options User Interface Alarm DSX 1 to Network Assignments Network to Network Assignments Voice Port Assignmen Sync Data Port Assignments OCU DP Port Assignments Communication P ort External Device Com Port Telnet FTP Sessions t5 Clear Assignments System amp NAM APM Management and Communication MAIN MENU Status Configuration Control Test Network Tests DSX 1 Tests Sync Data Port Tests Voice Port Tests OCU DP Tests Device Tests Abort Tests MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration lay Control COM Port Call Setup COM Port Call Directories Device Name Date amp Time Administer Logins System Alarm Relay Cut Off Clear Device Fail Reset Device Communication Protocol General SNMP Management SNMP NMS Security SNMP Traps 98 15081 03 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Recording Configurations It is recommended that you keep a record of each T1 access unit s configuration which can also be used when configuring the T1 access unit For additional information about configurations refer to Chapter 5 Setting Up p Procedure 1 Photocopy or print the worksheets included in this appendix Make as many copies of each table as needed 2 Write the T1 access unit s Device Name on each photocopied or printed page 3 Write in or circle the
204. ified as either read only or read write in the MIB RFCs Read Write Allows read and write access to the objects in the MIB for the NAM when using the Community Name 2 configuration option Allows access for all objects specified as read write in the MIB RFCs However access for all read only objects is specified as read only 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 71 Setting Up Setting Up SNMP NMS Security Use the SNMP NMS Security Options see Table 5 16 to specify whether a security check is performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Configuration Edit Display gt Management and Communication SNMP NMS Security Table 5 16 SNMP NMS Security Options 1 of 2 NMS IP Validation Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether security checks are performed on the IP address of SNMP management systems attempting to access the node Allows access only if IP address of the sending manager is listed on the SNMP NMS Security Options screen Enable Performs security checks Disable Does not perform security checks Number of Managers Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 1 Specifies the number of SNMP management systems that are authorized to send SNMP messages to the T1 access unit An IP address must be configured for each management system allowed to send messages Configure the IP addresses in the NMS n IP Addr
205. ime as an OCU Loopback No other tests can be running when an OCU Loopback test is initiated m Line Loopback DS 0 Loopback The DS 0 Loopback loops the data received from the T1 interface for the selected port back to the T1 interface OCU T1 APM NAM OCU All Network Port 1s Interface DS 0 Loopback 98 15960 The following test is the only test allowed to run at the same time as an DS 0 Loopback No other tests can be running when a DS 0 Loopback test is initiated m Line Loopback 9 40 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Line Loopback The Line Loopback tests the local loop between the OCU port and the attached CPE The loopback occurs on the APM near the local loop interface toward the local loop OCU T1 ae APM NAM Loopback OCU Network Port Interface All 1s 98 15961 The following tests are the only tests allowed to run at the same time as a Line Loopback No other tests can be running when a Line Loopback test is initiated m OCU Loopback m DS 0 Loopback m Line Loopback on the cross connected T1 interface m Payload Loopback on the cross connected T1 interface 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 9 41 Troubleshooting Data Loopback The Data Loopback tests the APM circuitry and the local loop connecting the port to the CPE The loopback occurs on the APM near the backplane connection toward the local loop OCU T1 Data APM NAM Loopback OCU Network Port Interface All 1s 98 15962 The followin
206. in 8 Pattern Start Monitor 3 in 24 Pattern Stop Monitor 3 in 24 Pattern Start Monitor 63 Pattern Stop Monitor 63 Pattern Start Monitor 511 Pattern Stop Monitor 511 Pattern Start Monitor 2047 Pattern Stop Monitor 2047 Pattern Start Monitor 215 1 Pattern Stop Monitor 215 1 Pattern Start Monitor 220 1 Pattern Stop Monitor 220 1 Pattern Start Monitor User Defined Pattern Stop Monitor User Defined Pattern Inject Error Clear Monitor Error Number of Errors Monitored Number of Errors Injected Set devDS1TestControl for monQRSS on the interface devDS1TestControl for monQRSS to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for monZeros on the interface devDS1TestControl for monZeros to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for monOnes on the interface devDS1TestControl for monOnes to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon1in8 on the interface devDS1TestControl for montin8to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon3in24 on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon3in24 to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon63 on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon63 to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon511 on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon511 to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon2047 on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon2047 to idle on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon2E15 on the interface devDS1TestControl for mon2E15to idle on the interface devDS1T
207. ing bits Federal Communications Commission The Board of Commissioners that regulates all electrical communications that originate in the United States Facility Data Link The selected framing bits in the ESF format used in a wide area link that are used for control monitoring and testing Foreign Exchange Office An APM that extends voice channel connectivity to remote switching equipment The FXO interface appears as a telephone to the connecting equipment Foreign Exchange Office Software Defined Network Foreign Exchange Station An APM that provides voice channel connectivity directly to handsets or to PBX equipment Foreign Exchange Station Software Defined Network Internet Control Management Protocol Internet protocol that allows for the generation of error messages tests packets and information messages related to IP Internet Protocol An open networking protocol used for internet packet delivery International Telecommunication Union The telecommunications agency of the United Nations established to provide standardized communications procedures and practices Before March 1993 it was called CCITT Line Build out The amount of attenuation of the transmitted signal that is used to compensate for the length of wire between the transmitter and the receiver Liquid Crystal Display Thin glass plates containing liquid crystal material When voltage is applied the amount of light able to pass through the glass plates
208. into the Assign To field If you want to assign to Then enter Network interface timeslots Net1 or Net2 DSX 1 interface timeslots on the 9161 DSX01 1 Single T1 NAM 3 Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired slot and port Repeat this step until all desired timeslots are assigned 4 Select Save to save the assignments or press ESC to save and return to the Cross Connect menu 5 46 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Clearing Port Assignments 9161 A2 GH30 30 This device A specified slot A specified interface gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Setting Up Clearing port assignments sets the selected timeslots to unassigned You can clear all port assignments for Configuration Edit Display Cross Connect gt Clear Assignments 2 Select one of the following To clear Then select All assignments for the DSX 1 time slots Network time slots voice ports and Sync Data ports Clear All All assignments for the Network 1 Interface time slots Clear Network 1 Interface Time Slots All assignments for the Network 2 Interface time slots Clear Network 2 Interface Time Slots All assignments for the DSX01 1 time slots on a 9161 Single T1 NAM Clear DSX01 1 Time Slots Assignments for the synchronous data ports on the NAM in slot ss Clear Slot ss NAM Sync Data Ports Al
209. ion Instructions for more information The Dual DSX APM which supports Two DSX 1 drop and insert ports See the 9109 Dual DSX Application Module APM Installation Instructions for more information The E amp M Voice APM which supports E amp M Type I Il IV or V circuits u law PCM coding of analog voice line Enterprise MIB for testing and some configuration functions See the 9109 E amp M Analog Voice Application Module APM Installation Instructions for more information The FXO Voice APM which supports FXO circuits u law PCM coding of analog voice line Enterprise MIB for testing and some configuration functions See the 9109 FXO Analog Voice Application Module APM Installation Instructions for more information The FXS Voice APM which supports FXS circuits u law PCM coding of analog voice line Enterprise MIB for testing and some configuration functions OV S Ole gor S O ES 2 0f 3 O e zO 2 8LO Ja D AL o O 6 O g 5 gt E Q o 30 O O Oc O3 O O Ox 496 15154 97 15649 01 e E e O g O g O 8 m n RU E 3 496 1514 97 15648 496 15139 See the 9109 FXS Analog Voice Application Module APM Installation Instructions for more information April 1998 1 5 About the T1 Access Mux Features The OCU DP APM which supports Either two or six ports
210. is altered so that messages can be displayed Light Emitting Diode A light or status indicator that glows in response to the presence of a certain condition e g an alarm Line Loopback A test in which the received signal on the network interface is looped back to the network without change April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 LOF LOFC loopback LOS MIB MUX NAM OCU DP OOF OPX PAD PBX PDU PDV PLAR PPP PSTN QRSS RBS RIP SES SLIP SNMP UAS Vac 9161 A2 GH30 30 Glossary Loss of Frame Occurs when a DS1 terminal is unable to synchronize on the DS1 signal for some interval Loss of Frame Count The number of LOFs declared A diagnostic procedure that sends a test message back to its origination point Used to test various portions of a data link in order to isolate an equipment or data line problem Loss of Signal The T1 line condition where there are no pulses Management Information Base A database of managed objects used by SNMP to provide network management information and device control Multiplexer A device used to interleave or simultaneously transmit multiple independent data streams into a single high speed data stream Multiplexing techniques include FDM frequency division multiplexing TDM time division multiplexing and STDM statistical time division multiplexing Network Access Module A type of CCA that accesses or acts as an interface with the network Office Channel U
211. is phenomenon exists and if necessary implement corrective action prior to interconnecting the products Filler panels are provided with the housings to cover unused slots You must install filler panels on the unused slots to avoid possible injury from electrical shock and to maintain compliance with FCC rules In addition if the equipment is to be used with telecommunications circuits take the following precautions Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Avoid using a telephone other than a cordless type during an electrical storm There may be a remote risk of electric shock from lightning Do not use the telephone to report a gas leak in the vicinity of the leak July 1998 9161 A2 GH30 31 Important Regulatory Information Government Requirements Certain governments require that instructions pertaining to connection to the telephone network be included in the installation and operation manual Specific instructions are listed in the following sections United States Notice to Users of the Telephone Network This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules On the equipment is a label or si
212. isting cross connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared The message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl a key acts as a No Yes Port status is disabled and any cross connections are cleared 5 32 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 7 OCU DP Options Slot ss Port p Options 2 of 3 Port Rate Possible Settings 56K 64KCC Switched 56 Default Setting 56K Selects the rate for the port Port Rate only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 56K The setting for 56 kbps 64KCC The setting for 64 kbps Clear Channel Switched 56 The rate for 4 wire Switched 56 Loopback Detection Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the the T1 access unit will detect loopback activation codes coming from the network Loopback Detection only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Enable Loopback code detection is enabled Disable Loopback code detection is disabled Loss of Signal Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether an ASCII alarm will be generated when a Loss of Signal condition is detected Loss of Signal Alarm only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Enable An alarm is generated when a Loss of Signal condition
213. itched 56 Loopbacks DS 0 OCU Line OCU Data OCU Local and Remote Latching and Non Latching DSU CSU April 1998 F 7 Technical Specifications F 8 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Equipment List 9161 A2 GH30 30 Equipment Feature Number 2 Slot Housing 2 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Cables Manuals 9002 B1 200 2 Slot Housing 9161 Single T1 NAM 120 Vac Power Supply 9162 A1 201 Cables Manuals 2 Slot Housing 9261 Dual T1 NAM 120 Vac Power Supply Cables 9262 A1 201 Manuals 5 Slot Housing Desktop 5 Slot Housing 120 Vac Power Supply Cables Manuals 9005 B1 200 Rack Mount 5 Slot Housing without bezel and chassis skins 9005 B1 209 120 Vac Power Supply Cables Manuals Desktop 5 Slot Housing DC Power Supply Cables Manuals 9005 B1 500 Rack Mount 5 Slot Housing without bezel and chassis skins DC 9005 B1 509 Power Supply Cables Manuals Desktop 5 Slot Housing 9161 Single T1 NAM 120 Vac Power 9165 A1 201 Supply Cables Manuals Rack Mount 5 Slot Housing without bezel and chassis skins 9165 A1 209 9161 Single T1 NAM AC Power Supply Cables Manuals Desktop 5 Slot Housing 9161 Single T1 NAM DC Power Supply 9165 A1 501 Cables Manuals Rack Mount 5 Slot Housing without bezel and chassis skins 9165 A1 509 9161 Single T1 NAM DC Power Supply Cables Manuals Desktop 5 Slot Housing 9261 Dual T1 NAM 120 Vac Power 9265 A1 201 Supply Ca
214. king management Unavailable Seconds A count of one second intervals when service is unavailable Volts alternating current April 1998 GL 3 Glossary VF Voice Frequency The part of the audio frequency range used to transmit voice sound usually 300 Hz to 3400 Hz This band is used by the modem for its modulated signal virtual circuit A logical link connection or packet switching mechanism established between two devices at the start of transmission Yellow Alarm An outgoing signal transmitted when a DS1 terminal has determined that it has lost the incoming signal GL 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Index Numbers 3 Amphenol plug 1 Amphenol plug 3 Amphenol plug 4 Amphenol plug 64KCC Loop OOF Alarm OCU DP A Abnormal Station Code Alarm OCU DP aborting tests Access asynch terminal user interface 4 1 limiting Limiting Async Terminal Direct access to user interface resetting restoring access carrier Access Level assigning 6 6 security Access Type 6 8 Accessing the User Interface 4 8 Action on Network Yellow Alarm adding Identity information Administer Logins Alarm amp Trap Dial Out 8 6 ASCII messages options 5 64 worksheet A 13 Alarm amp Trap Dial Out Alarm Indication Signal AIS alarms 9 12 dialing out viewing messages 9 12 Already Active 7 16 Alternate Communication Port IP Address Alternate Communication Port Subnet Address 5 69 Alternat
215. l or SLIP link layer protocol for IP traffic serial connection m Each T1 unit s routing table supports a maximum of 300 routes even though a single route is all that is needed to reach every device on a subnet m Have a default route set only for devices directly connected to the NMS s COM port m Allow any legal host address for a given subnet the address choice within the subnet is not important to the unit but should be selected in conjunction with all IP addressing for the subnet m For a point to point ESF T1 link use the FDL to connect to the remote site m Fora fractional T1 network use EDL s to connect to each remote site when at least one data port is configured at that site 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 B 1 IP Addressing m Fora fractional T1 network when a data port is not configured in the case of voice only a single DDL can be used to connect to a remote site NOTE When dealing with IP addressing your Information Systems IS department needs to be involved since they typically dictate the IP addressing scheme used in an organization B 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 IP Addressing IP Addressing Scheme Examples The following examples describe some typical network scenarios they are not the only scenarios that can be used The subnet mask shown for each T1 access unit is 255 255 255 0 Direct Management Links to Remote T1 Access Units In this example T1 Access Unit A is connected to m The N
216. l assignments for the DSX 1 interface 1 time slots in slot ss Clear DSXss 1 Interface Time Slots All assignments for the DSX 1 interface 2 time slots in slot ss Clear DSXss 2 Interface Time Slots Assignments for timeslots or ports on the APM in slot ss Clear Slot ss xxxxx where xxxxx name or type of APM April 1998 5 47 Setting Up Setting System Options Use the System Options screen see Table 5 9 to set the m Generation of yellow alarm signals m User initiated test timeout m Clock Source primary secondary external clock rate m Generation of primary secondary clock failure ASCII alarm messages Use the following menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display System Options Table 5 9 System Options 1 of 4 Generate Yellow Alarm Signals Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether the T1 access unit generates yellow alarm signals on the network and DSX 1 Drop Insert T1 interfaces The yellow alarm signal is generated in accordance with AT amp T Pub TR 62411 when a continuous LOS OOF condition red Carrier Failure Alarm CFA or AIS signal Blue CFA is detected Generate Yellow Alarm Signals does not appear if DSX 1 Interface on the 9161 Single T1 NAM is set to Disable or 9261 Dual T1 NAM is installed Enable The T1 access unit generates yellow alarm signals Disable The T1 access unit does not generate yel
217. l for sendUserDefined to idle on the interface Stop Send User Defined Pattern 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 D 9 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 10 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main test port sync data cont d Start Monitor QRSS Pattern Stop Monitor QRSS Pattern Start Monitor All Zeros Pattern Stop Monitor All Zeros Pattern Start Monitor All Ones Pattern Stop Monitor All Ones Pattern Start Monitor 63 Pattern Stop Monitor 63 Pattern Start Monitor 511 Pattern Stop Monitor 511 Pattern Start Monitor 2047 Pattern Stop Monitor 2047 Pattern Start Monitor 215 1 Pattern Stop Monitor 215 1 Pattern Start Monitor 220 1 Pattern Stop Monitor 220 1 Pattern Start Monitor User Defined Pattern Stop Monitor User Defined Pattern Inject Error Clear Monitor Error Number of Errors Monitored Number of Errors Injected Set devSyncPortTestControl for monQRSS on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for monQRSS to idle on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for monZeros on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for monZeros to idle on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for monOnes on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for monOnes to idle on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon63 on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon63 to idle on the interface devSyncPortTestControl for mon511 on the interface devSyncPort
218. l request Disable Does not generate a ring back tone toward the network in response to an incoming call request 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 31 Setting Up Table 5 6 FXS Voice Slot ss Port p Options 4 of 4 Trunk Cond in CGA Possible Settings Busy Idle Default Setting Busy Determines the trunk condition or state that the port is forced into as a result of the Carrier Group Alarm CGA Trunk Cond in CGA only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Busy Forces the port to Busy during the Carrier Group Alarm Idle Forces the port to Idle during the Carrier Group Alarm Configuring OCU DP Ports Use the OCU DP Options Table 5 7 to configure the ports either two or six on the OCU DP APM in the selected slot Configuration Edit Display OCU DP Ports The OCU DP Options screen appears for Port 1 of the first slot containing an OCU DP APM Table 5 7 OCU DP Options Slot ss Port p Options 1 of 3 Port Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the OCU DP port is in use and can be configured and used to transmit and receive data OCU DP options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable Enable The port is active and can be configured used to Disable The port is not active cannot be configured and cannot transmit receive data No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated Ex
219. le Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the E amp M voice port is in use and can be configured and assigned to a time slot on the T1 or DSX 1 interface in order to transmit and receive voice frequency signals E amp M Voice options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable Enable The port is active and can be configured and assigned to a timeslot Disable The port is not active cannot be configured and does not take up a time slot No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated Existing cross connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared The message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl a key acts as a No Yes Port status is disabled and any cross connections are cleared Operating Mode Possible Settings E amp M Transmit Only Default Setting E amp M Selects the operating mode for the E amp M voice port Operating Mode only appears if Port Status is set to Enable E amp M Enables normal earth and magnetic E amp M mode Transmit Only Enables the mode used to support 4 wire private line modems that do not require E amp M signaling April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 4 E amp M Voice Slot ss Port p Options 2 of 2 Rx Gain dB Possible Settings 17 0 716 5 16 0 715 5 15 0
220. lk screened text that contains among other information the FCC registration number for this equipment If requested please provide this information to your telephone company If your T1 equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance But if advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will be advised of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your telephone company may make changes in facilities equipment operations or procedures that could affect the proper operation of your equipment If so you will be given advance notice so as to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service No repairs may be performed by the user Should you experience difficulty with this equipment refer to the Warranty Sales and Service Information section on page A Make the T1 network connection using a Universal Service Order Code USOC type RJ48C jack for single line installations and type RJ48H jack for multiline installations Specify both the Service Order Code 6 0N as well as the proper Facility Interface Code to the telephone company when ordering the T1 line The T1 equipment can be configured to support any of the framing format and line signaling techniques shown in the table below The T1 equipment s configuration must correspond to the T1 line s parameters Facility Interface Codes
221. low alarm signals NOTE When this configuration option is disabled the DTE equipment connected to the DSX 1 interface is responsible for generation of the yellow alarm signal for CFAs on the network T1 Test Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Determines whether or not user initiated loopback and pattern tests have a duration after which they are terminated This option does not pertain to a DTE initiated loopback Enable User initiated loopback and pattern tests have a timeout This setting is recommended when the T1 access unit is managed remotely through an in band data stream such as EDL FDL or DDL If the T1 access unit is accidently commanded to execute a test on the interface providing the management access control can be regained after the timeout expires terminating the test Disable Loopback and pattern tests must be manually terminated 5 48 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 9 System Options 2 of 4 Test Duration min Possible Settings 1 120 Default Setting 10 Specifies the duration of the user initiated loopback or pattern tests Test Duration min only appears if Test Timeout is set to Enable 1 to 120 Timeout values in minutes Primary Clock Source Possible Settings Net1 Net2 DSXss p Internal External Sync Data Default Setting Net1 The source selected for this configuration option provides
222. mation 0 00 cece eee eee 5 3 m Setting Date and Time secsec tercii centis eee eee 5 4 m Configuring the T1 Access Unit 0000 c cece eee 5 4 Recommended Order of Configuration eeee eee 5 5 Configuration Option Areas 0 cece eee ee 5 5 Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options 5 5 Changing Configuration Options 0 ccc eee eee 5 6 Saving Configuration Options sessi sasda ia seua taia eee eee 5 6 m Configuring T1 and DSX 1 Interfaces 0 cece eee eee 5 7 Configuring the Network Interface 00 eee 5 7 Configuring the DSX 1 Interface 2c cee eee ee 5 14 B Gonfiguting PONS f0 caceeiie ded le iad ehe irn a 5 16 Configuring Syne Data Poms 2 2 cerei ta gere Becta rs 5 16 Configuring Voice POMS iie eeseRI RE eR ERE wERREEREG 5 24 Configuring OCU DP Ports susesssssessese esee 5 32 Gopying Port Gontigurations a esso ianiai Re RR at 5 35 ii April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 6 Security 9161 A2 GH30 30 Contents m Assigning Cross Connections sas erii eusian ea a kan ia 5 36 Assigning DSX 1 Timeslots to the Network Interface 5 39 DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning 5 40 Assigning Network 2 Timeslots to Network 1 Interface Timeslots 5 43 Network to Network Signaling Assignments and Trunk CGNGUONING 09 nore cent her ten DE endi nesta Sanne eins 5 43 Assigning V
223. metric The user set is a copy of the Telco set but the user set can be cleared In addition to the metrics kept for the network interface the value of the Status Event Register is kept for each 15 minute interval user count only The system records the occurrence of the following events in the Status column m Yellow Alarm Y m Loss of Signal L m Excessive Error Rate E m Frame Synchronization Bit Error F m Line Code Violation V m None NOTE Network performance statistics are only available for those interfaces using ESF framing Verify that the Line Framing Format field on the Network Interface screen is set to ESF To help you in selecting trouble spots a Worst Interval is displayed on Line 18 The Worst Interval contains the largest number of seconds for either ES UAS SES BES or CSS or the greatest Loss of Frame Count LOFC If more than one interval contains the same worst value then the oldest interval is displayed Sync Data Performance Statistics 9161 A2 GH30 30 For the sync data performance statistics these metrics are kept for each 15 minute interval over the past 8 hour period Both near end and far end statistics are kept To help you in selecting trouble spots a Worst Interval is displayed on Line 18 for both near end and far end values The Worst Interval contains the largest number of seconds for either ES UAS SES BES or the greatest LOFC If more than one interval contains the same wors
224. modem is allowed on the communication port To connect to an external device m Use the appropriate cable to attach to the COM port as defined in Appendix E Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments m Set the modem for DTR Disconnect using the AT command AT D2 Use the External Device Options screen to set the necessary configuration options that allow dial in access through the COM port p Procedure To control dial in access 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration 2 Select the desired configuration area and press Return Load Configuration From Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 3 Follow this menu selection sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display User Interface External Device Com Port The External Device Options screen appears 4 Select a setting for the Dial In Access configuration option To Set the Dial In Access configuration option to Enable dial in access Enable Disable dial in access Disable NOTE The data that you enter determines which options display and their order 5 Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area 6 To save changes select Save and press Return 7 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return Save Configuration To Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2
225. n 92 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 7 Declares an EER if more than 9 CRC5 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 10 6 1075 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 10 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 8 Declares an EER if more than 41 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 1077 10 8 10 5 or 1074 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 42 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 9 Declares an EER if more than 4 CRC5 errors are detected in three 15 minute intervals or a 10 8 1077 10 6 10 5 or 107 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 5 CRC5 errors are detected within the same time period 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 23 Setting Up Configuring Voice Ports 5 24 Use the E amp M Table 5 4 FXO Table 5 5 and FXS Table 5 6 Voice Options to configure the voice port on the voice APM in the selected slot Configuration Edit Display Voice Ports The Voice Port Options screen appears for Port 1 of the first slot containing a voice APM either FXS FXO or E amp M The displayed fields differ depending on the type of voice APM in the selected slot For E amp M Voice Ports Table 5 4 E amp M Voice Slot ss Port p Options 1 of 2 Port Status Possible Settings Enable Disab
226. n Embedded Data Link EDL associated with a Sync Data port m Use a Direct Data Link DDL Management Control Using the ESF FDL 2 4 You can configure the T1 access unit to use FDL as a management link if available for a point to point ESF T1 link where FDL is end to end T1 Access T1 Access Physical Connection FDL 496 15183 As shown in the example in band management is accomplished through the FDL between the two T1 access units Management data for T1 Access Unit B goes to T1 Access Unit A which then routes it into the FDL between the units This example assumes that the NMS or Host that is attempting to access T1 Access Unit B is attached using SLIP or PPP via the COM port on T1 Access Unit A Set the Management Link configuration option to FDL Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Network Interface April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Management and Control Management Control Using an EDL 9161 A2 GH30 30 In the configuration below the T1 access unit s management data is multiplexed with customer data by taking 8 Kbps of the allocated data on a port to use as the EDL There is one configured EDL through the network to each unit m Ashared circuit for management and customer data T1 Access Unit C Porty Cluster Controller T1 Access _ T1 Access pP UnitA FEP Router Physical Connection Router EDL 496 15184
227. n alarm message is generated when an excessive error rate condition is detected on the network interface Excessive Error Rate only appears if Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable Generates an ASCII alarm message Disable Does not generate an ASCII alarm message 5 12 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 1 Network Interface Options 7 of 7 Excessive Error Rate Threshold Possible Settings 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 Default Setting 10E 4 Sets the error rate threshold that determines when an excessive error rate EER condition is declared The excessive error rate is determined by the ratio of the number of CRC6 errors to the total number of bits received over a set period of time Excessive Error Rate Threshold only appears if Line Framing Format is set to ESF 10E 4 Declares an EER if more than 1 535 CRC6 errors are detected in a 10 second period Clears when fewer than 1 536 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 5 Declares an EER if more than 921 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 922 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 6 Declares an EER if more than 92 CRC6 errors are detected in a 60 second period or a 1079 or 10 4 condition occurs Clears when fewer than 93 CRC6 errors are detected within the same time period 10E 7 De
228. n appears See Resetting the T1 Access Unit from the Control Menu to reset the unit 5 Tab to the desired method and enter yes or y for the selected prompt If entering yes to prompt Then Reset COM Port usage Port Type is set to Terminal Data Rate Kbps is set to 19 2 Character Length is set to 8 Stop Bits is set to 1 Parity is set to None External Device Commands is set to Disable Reload Factory Defaults All factory loaded configuration and control settings contained in the Default Factory configuration area are loaded If no or n is entered or if no selection is made within 30 seconds the T1 access unit returns to the condition of operation it was in when the system pause was initiated with the COM port settings returning to their configured states If you choose yes the T1 access unit resets itself going through a Device Self Test Connectivity is restored and the Main Menu screen appears 8 14 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting What Are the Troubleshooting Features The T1 access unit is designed to provide you with many years of trouble free service If a communication problem occurs however refer to the information in this chapter for possible solutions The T1 access unit can m Detect and report faults m Perform diagnostic tests Use the test jacks on the front panel of the Single and Dual T1 NAM and the DSX APM to help isolate problems
229. n one field within a column on the same screen Down Arrow or Ctrl d Move cursor one character to the right if in edit mode Right Arrow or Ctrl f Move cursor one character to the left if in edit mode Left Arrow or Ctrl b Redraw the screen display clearing information typed in but not yet entered Ctrl l Accept entry or display valid options on the last row of the screen when pressed before entering data or after entering invalid data Return Enter April 1998 4 5 User Interface Screen Function Keys All screen function keys located in the lower part of the screen operate the same way upper or lowercase throughout the screens These keys use the following conventions For the screen Select function And press Return to Morm MainMenu Return to the Main Menu screen Eore Exit Terminate the async terminal session Norn New Enter new data Ooro Modify Modify existing data Lorl Delete Delete data Sors Save Save information Rorr Refresh Update screen with current information Corc ClrStats Clear network performance statistics and refresh the screen Uoru PgUp Display the previous page Dord PgDn Display the next page 4 6 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Selecting from a Menu Selecting a Field Making Input Selections 9161 A2 GH30 30 User Interface You select from a menu to get subsequent menus or screens so you
230. n only applies to COM port external device connections initiated as a result of sending the SNMP trap message Enable Disconnects the COM port external device call after sending an SNMP trap message Disable Does not disconnect the COM port external device call after sending an SNMP trap message and holds the line until it is disconnected manually or by the remote modem This enables the NMS to poll the NAM for more information after receiving the SNMP traps 5 64 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 13 Alarm Options 2 of 3 Call Retry Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Controls whether an incomplete call busy no answer etc from the alarm or SNMP trap to the COM port s external device is retried Attempts the call up to 5 times per alarm or SNMP trap message Enable Retries incomplete calls with a delay as specified by the Dial Out Delay Time configuration option between call attempts Disable Does not retry an incomplete call Dial Out Delay Time Min Possible Settings 1 10 Default Setting 5 Specifies the number of minutes to wait between successive dial out alarms and SNMP trap messages and call retry attempts in minutes 1 10 The number of minutes to delay between calls Alternate Dial Out Directory Possible Settings None 1 5 Default Setting None Specifies whether an incomplete call busy or no answer
231. nal Switched 56K DSU CSUs This connection can be up to 18 000 feet The OCU DP APM converts the 56K digital format from the line side into a digital DSO format This DSO format contains the 56K of data plus the necessary signaling information required to set up the call to the far end video equipment 4 Wire Video Switched Codec 56K Facility Switched LAN 56K Facility lt A Z 56K DDS PSTN E E Integral 56K T1 Access DSU CSU Mux with DSU CSUs OCU DP Cards s 98 15972 Video Conferencing April 1998 3 9 Applications Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits 3 10 The following example illustrates how to use the OCU DP APM to reduce facility costs associated with point to point 56 64K connections by consolidating these lines into a single T1 facility The T1 Access Muxes shown in this application could also be used to support both voice and high speed data Typically T1 Access Muxes are placed at concentration points where a single T1 line is less costly than multiple typically four or five 56K lines If DSUs are left at both ends of the circuit proprietary DSU Network Management Systems can be used Or circuits associated with remote DSUs can be terminated directly on a Sync Data APM at the Data Center to eliminate Data Center DSUs The OCU DP APM does not support subrate DDS rates Subrate applications can be supported by installing a Paradyne 3610 or similar device configured for 56 64K lin
232. nchronous data port when a yellow alarm is received on the network interface A yellow alarm indicates a problem with the signal being transmitted to the network None No action taken when a yellow alarm is received Halt Halts the transmission of data received on the synchronous data port and all ones are sent on circuit BB ITU 104 Receive Data RD and circuit CB ITU 106 Clear to Send CTS is deasserted to the port when a yellow alarm is received Network Initiated Data Channel Loopback DCLB Possible Settings Disable V 54 FT1 Both Default Setting Disable Allows the initiation and termination of the data channel loopback V 54 loop 2 to be controlled by the receipt of a DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequence either V 54 or FT1 ANSI compliant sequences from the network or far end unit When this configuration is enabled V 54 FT1 or Both receiving a DCLB actuate sequence on a particular port causes the NAM to initiate a DCLB on that port provided that a DCLB can be performed based on the current state of the port and NAM Receiving a DCLB release sequence terminates the DCLB Disable Ignores the DCLB actuate and DCLB release for the port V 54 DCLB actuate and DCLB release sequences that comply with the V 54 standard for inter DCE signaling for point to point circuits are recognized and will control the initiation and termination of a DCLB V 54 Loop 2 for the port FT1 DC
233. net 135 18 2 0 Subnet 135 18 6 0 135 18 6 2 L 135 18 4 2 Subnet 135 18 4 0 Router 135 18 3 as Subnet 135 18 3 0 497 15196 01 B 6 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 IP Addressing Assigning IP Addresses and Subnet Masks 9161 A2 GH30 30 Once you select an IP scheme assign an address or addresses to the T1 access unit If using Then COM port as a management interface Assign the COM port address and net mask Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Management amp Communication Communication Protocol COM port connected to an external modem Configure using an alternate IP address Menu selection sequence Main Menu Configuration Management amp Communication Communication Protocol FDL DDL or EDL management links Assign IP addresses and net masks to each management link Menu selection sequences Main Menu Configuration Network for FDL and DDL Main Menu Configuration Sync Data Ports for EDL April 1998 B 7 IP Addressing B 8 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Traps This section describes the T1 access unit s compliance with SNMP format standards and with its special operational trap features The T1 access unit supports the following user interface traps along with several enterprise specific traps m warmStart m authenticationFailure m linkUp m linkDown These traps are
234. net or some other modem connection Connection is dropped and the screen is cleared 3 If ending a configuration editing session the Save Configuration screen appears with the Save Changes prompt If you select Then the No Session is terminated without the configuration option changes being saved Yes Save Configuration To screen appears Select a configuration option area to save your changes to Current Customer 1 or Customer 2 and press Return Configuration option changes are saved and the session is terminated 8 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Operation and Maintenance Supported SNMP Traps A trap is an unsolicited message that is sent from the T1 access unit to the SNMP trap manager when the T1 access unit detects certain prespecified conditions These traps enable the SNMP manager to gauge the state of the network The T1 access unit supports the following traps m warm start m authentication failure m enterprise specific those specific to T1 access unit m link up m link down Refer to Appendix D SNMP Cross Reference for more information on traps Dialing Out and Sending SNMP Traps 9161 A2 GH30 30 You can control whether generated SNMP trap messages will initiate a call if a connection on the COM port external device has not already been established Use the Alarms Options screen to enable the T1 access unit s automatic call initiation dial out
235. nfiguration Module Unsupported Slot ss The NAM does not recognize the APM 2 A Dual DSX APM has been installed in a Model 916x T1 Access Unit 1 Check that an E amp M Voice APM FXS Voice APM FXO Voice APM Dual DSX APM or Sync Data APM is installed in Slot ss 1 2 For Model 926x T1 Access Mux check that there is not more than one DSX APM installed only one is supported 3 Re download the NAM software if new APMs are supported in later releases 4 Replace the APM 5 Contact your service representative Remove the Dual DSX APM 1 ss represents physical slots Does not apply to the access carrier Self Test Results Messages 7 22 All self test results messages appear in the middle column of the System and Test Status screen see Table 7 3 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying System Information Table 7 3 Self Test Results Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do CPU Fail The CPU failed internal 1 Reset the unit and try testing again 2 Call your service representative for assistance 3 Return the unit to the factory NAM Fail One or more of the NAM s 1 Reset the unit and try integrated circuit chips failed internal device level testing again 2 Call your service representative for assistance 3 Return the unit to the factory Networkn T1 Fail The NAM failed to internally loop data on the selected Network T1
236. ng a community name and access level Read or Read Write Enabling SNMP management and specifying the IP addresses of only selected NMSs Redundant power supply Redundant load sharing supply both AC and DC versions available for the 5 slot housing and the access carrier Protects the system from a service outage if one power supply fails Wall Mount Bracket Allows one 5 slot or up to two 2 slot housings to be mounted on a wall April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Management and Control Overview This chapter provides the steps needed to provide management connectivity to the T1 access unit You need to select and configure m A method of local management connectivity for T1 access units m A method for end to end management connectivity across the network See Appendix B P Adaressing for an IP addressing scheme that fits the local and end to end management connectivity methods Configuring Local Management Control When managing the T1 access unit locally you can establish a management link in one of two ways You can m Create a management link directly connected through the COM port m Connect through an external device modem LAN adapter etc to the COM port 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 2 1 Management and Control Creating a Management Link Through the COM Port 2 2 When the COM port is configured as the IP management link Net Link the user interface is also accessible via Telnet Although not shown in th
237. nit Data Port Out Of Frame An error condition in which frame synchronization bits are in error Off Premises Extension Packet Assembly and Disassembly The term PAD often is used with regard to X 25 networks however it can apply to any packet switched network such as frame relay Private Branch Exchange Telephone switching equipment dedicated to one customer A PBX connects private telephones to each other and to the public dial network Protocol Data Unit A message containing protocol specific information Pulse Density Violation The number of ones marks pulses is not adequate for the line requirement Private Line Automatic Ringdown Point to Point Protocol as specified by Internet RFC 1661 Public Switched Telephone Network A network shared among many users who can use telephones to establish connections between two points Also known as dial network Quasi Random Signal A test pattern simulating a random pattern of digital ones and zeros used to simulate normal transmission Robbed Bit Signaling Signaling used for voice call processing over a T1 line Routing Information Protocol A protocol for exchanging routing information Severely Errored Seconds Usually defined as a second during which a specific number of CRC errors was exceeded or an OOF or other critical error occurred Serial Line Internet Protocol Protocol for serial operation on an internet Simple Network Management Protocol Protocol for open networ
238. nit Unit 496 15189 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data 3 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Applications T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and E amp M Analog PBXs shown in the following diagram typically communicate on trunk lines lines between switches with a type of communications protocol called E amp M The T1 access unit fully supports this application The T1 access unit supports up to three 8 port E amp M APMs In the example shown in the diagram eight time slots could be assigned to the voice ports two time slots to the FEP Cluster controller link and up to 14 time slots to the router link This provides the following m Voice Eight telephone calls m FEP CC 128 kbps m Router 896 kbps Downtown HQ Cluster Controller FEP Terminal T1 Access T1 Access Unit nit pm Router Router Mainframe c x PBX e 5 E Ju w i Analog Analog Q ae PBX PBX Suburban Office 496 15190 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and E amp M 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 3 3 Applications T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and APL In the example shown in the following diagram E amp M analog voice APMs are used to transport analog private line APL modem traffic instead of voice traffic In some parts of the country digital circuits are hard to obtain and many applications do not require the higher speeds of digital circuits This ap
239. nk Cond in CGA Busy Idle April 1998 A 7 Menus and Configuration Worksheets A 8 Device Name Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold FXO Voice See Table 5 5 Slot ss 2 slot 02 5 slot 02 03 04 05 Port p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Port Status Enable Disable Operating Mode FXO FXODN FXODN WINK DPT Signaling Type Loop Start Loop Start Fwd Disc Ground Start Terminating Impedance ohms 600 900 Wink Delay 10 ms 1 99 15 Wink Duration 10 ms 1 99 20 Rx Gain dB 10 00 9 5 9 0 8 5 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 42 0 Tx Attenuation dB 10 00 9 5 9 0 8 5 0 0 4 0 4 5 45 0 Trunk Cond in CGA Busy Idle April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold FXS Voice See Table 5 6 Slot ss 2 slot 02 5 slot 02 03 04 05 Port p 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Port Status Enable Disable Operating Mode FXS FXSDN FXSDN WINK PLAR DPO Signaling Type Loop Start Loop Start Fwd Disc Ground Start Ground Start Immediate Ground Start Automatic d3 d4 Terminating Impedance ohms 600 900 Wink Delay 10 ms 1 99 15 Wink Duration 10 ms 1 99 20 Rx Gain dB 10 00 9 5 9 0 8 5 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 42 0 Tx At
240. nnector Pinouts for T1 Mass Termination Cable 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 Direct Management Links to Remote T1 Access Units Routing to Remote T1 Access Units on the Same Subnet Routing to Remote Access Units Using Different Subnets Routing to Remote T1 Access Units Using Routers Assigning IP Addresses and Subnet Masks Tips wamol s cates IEEE NE RI ERR EM ERE Trap authentificationFailure cee eens Traps linkUp and linkKDown 000ee eee eee Traps Enterprise Specific 0 0 cece cee eens COM Port to Modem Cable 2 0 Gender Adapter Changer 0000eeeeee LAN Adapter and Cables 0 cece eens T1 Network Interface Cable ssseusus T1 Line Interface Cable 00 0 c eee EIA 530A to V 35 DTE Adapter Cable E amp M Voice APM Connector 000 Extension Gables over Pep rtp Xeskruwers OCU Port Gonleelor sisse ceased anes bh Contents vii Contents F Technical Specifications G Equipment List Glossary viii April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 About This Guide Document Purpose and Intended Audience This manual contains information needed to properly set up configure and verify operation of the 916x 926x T1 Access Mux It is designed for system designers engineers system administrators and operators Document Summary Section Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter
241. nnector assembly Extend the cable using the 25 foot Twisted pair T1 R1 1 Amphenol socket to 1 Amphenol T24 R24 S1 S2 plug 25 pair cable See 3 Amphenol Plugs to 1 Amphenol Plug Cable on Page E 17 for pin assignments 3 Amphenol plugs to 6 E amp M To consolidate signals from three voice APMs and segregate four applications onto four M66 blocks e g all transmit signals on one block all receive signals on a second block all E amp M signals on a third and all battery and signal ground signals on the fourth Extend the cable using the 25 foot 1 Amphenol socket to 1 Amphenol plug 25 pair cable See 3 Amphenol Plugs to 4 Amphenol Plugs Cable starting on Page E 19 for pin assignments April 1998 E 15 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments M66 Block D Voice APMs 97 15171 02 3 Amphenol Plugs to 1 Amphenol Plug Cable E 16 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 3 Amphenol Plugs to 1 Amphenol Plug Cable Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Connects Connects M66 to APM M66 to APM Plug Pin Plug Pin Signal Plug Pin Plug Pin Signal P4 1 M 1 RPoti P4 26
242. ns 0e ceca eens 3 7 Off Premises Extension OPX lsusssssssesesssseelrleeh 3 8 Direct inward Dial BID wt 2 oeste oe wae a REN wh ee 3 8 Video Conferencing ac e lesse sere Re Eme RR deed e ee REGE 3 9 Consolidated T1 Access of DDS Circuits 00000 eee eee 3 10 April 1998 Contents 4 User Interface MB nisse RD E EE 4 1 m Async Terminal User Interface Access 0 cece eee eee 4 1 m Network Management cece cece nn 4 1 E Mena Hierarehy occ eor e per P Ebo edet REDE hae bee 4 1 Main Menu Sereen unice pee Pre x E e Ea 4 2 m Screen Fleld Types cose Sik DR Rer ERR E E Re WEAR DRE REY 4 2 What Affects Screen Displays ssssselsleesesssesee 4 3 Screen Work Areas 0 cece tetas 4 3 m Navigating the Screens 00 cece eens 4 5 Keyboard KGy Sic ene Uem e e Vut tee Kade Pane Bed te xen pate Red hate n 4 5 Screen Function Keys uc aided E rm heme 4 6 Selecting from a Menu seeesseseeseele eene 4 7 Selecting a Field Lasers phe ay eee EXE ER nee DONE dU 4 7 Making Input Selections rre cle chI RE Eee eel eR YS 4 7 Switching Between Screen Work Areas sess 4 8 Accessing the User Interface 0 00 cc cece eee eee eee 4 8 5 Setting Up m Considerations When Setting Up 02 0 cece eee eee 5 1 Selecting a Management Interface 0 cece eee eee 5 2 LEM Noon REPE 5 2 m Adding System Identity Infor
243. nt between devices Routing Information Protocol does not appear if EDL is set to Disable EDL Management Link is set to Disable Management Link is set to FDL None Does not use routing information protocol Use this setting when the device at the other end of the management link cannot accept routing information Proprietary Uses a proprietary variant of RIP version 1 to communicate routing information between devices April 1998 5 21 Setting Up Table 5 3 Synchronous Data Port Options 6 of 7 Near End Performance Statistics Possible Settings Disable Maintain Send Both Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the T1 access unit maintains near end performance statistics and sends Performance Report Messages PRMs for the synchronous data port Near End Performance Statistics does not appear if EDL is set to Disable Management Link is set to FDL NOTE Ifthe local T1 access unit is configured to send near end performance statistics then the remote T1 access unit must be configured to maintain far end performance statistics Disable Does not maintain near end performance statistics or send PRMs Maintain Maintain near end performance statistics for the port Send Send PRMs over the port s EDL every second Each PRM contains the performance statistics for the previous 4 seconds Both Maintain near end performance statistics and send PRMs over the por
244. nterface Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to the same interface April 1998 9 27 Troubleshooting Data Port Tests Data port tests are available to run on any of the synchronous DTE interfaces on the T1 NAM and the Sync Data APM m Data port loopbacks are defined in ITU V 54 and ANSI T1 403 m The Send V 54 Up Down and FT1 Up Down perform a similar function to LLB Up and LLB Down but are only sent on the DSOs associated with a particular data port and will control the remote operation of the Data Channel Loopback a Sync Data Port test m DTE Payload Loopback on the same port p Procedure To start and stop a data port loopback test 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test gt Sync Data Port Tests 2 Enter the desired slot and port number 3 Highlight Start under Command in the selected test s row to send a test Then press Return to start the test 4 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column 5 Highlight Stop under Command to stop the test DTE Loopback DTLB 9 28 The DTE Loopback DTLB performs the same function on the DTE interface that the LLB does on the Network or DSX 1 interface Use DTLB for isolating problems on the DTE interface An attached device or test equipment must generate data to be looped back DSX Network Port Interface y DCE DCE Port 2 Port 1 496 15213 The following test cannot be running when a DTL
245. nterface between the 25 position Sync Data Port connector and a DTE s RS449 connector Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments 530 Signal Shield TXD A TXD B RXD A RXD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B RTS A RTS B CTS A CTS B DTR RLSD A RLSD B DSR Sig Common RL LL RCV Common TT A TT B TM Sig Common DB25 Plug DB37 449 Socket Signal Shield TD A TD B RD A RD B TXC A TXC B RXC A RXC B RTS A RTS B CTS A CTS B DTR A RR A RR B DM A RL LL TT A TT B TM DM B DTR B Sig Common RCV Common April 1998 E 9 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments The following table provides the pin assignments for the 25 position Sync Data connector interface and a DTE s 37 position RS449 connector 25 Pin 37 Pin ITU Plug Socket Signal CCITT 4 Pin Direction Pin Shield 1 1 Transmit Data TXD TD 103 2 A To DCE 4 A 14 B 22 B Receive Data RXD RD 104 3 A From DCE 6 A 16 B 24 B Request to Send RTS 105 4 A To DCE 7 A 19 B 25 B Clear to Send CTS 106 5 A From DCE 9 A 13 B 27 B Data Set Ready Data Mode 107 6 From DCE 11 A DSR DM Signal Ground SG 102A 7 19 Data Channel Received Line 109 8 A From DCE 13 A Signal Detect Receiver Ready 10 B 31 B RLS
246. nts on the T1 interface DSX 1 Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the DSX 1 interfaces Tis Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on both the T1 Network and DSX 1 interfaces Ports Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific events on the synchronous data ports and OCU ports All Generate SNMP trap messages for linkUp and enterpriseSpecific events on the synchronous data ports the OCU ports the T1 network interface and the DSX 1 interface 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 77 Setting Up Setting Up and Placing a Call Configure your external device Then use the Call Setup screen to Look up the desired telephone number m Dial a call m Disconnect a call p Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Control Call Setup 2 The Control menu appears Select Call Setup and press Return 3 The Call Setup screen appears Enter the number of the directory containing the desired telephone number in the Directory Number field The telephone number appears in the Directory Phone Number field See Displaying Directory Numbers and Changing Directory Numbers in Chapter 9 Troubleshooting and Maintenance for information about the call directory 4 Select Dial and press the Enter key to initiate dialing 5 To end the call select Disconnect and press the Enter key 5 78 April 1998 9161 A
247. o send a Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test gt Sync Data Port Tests 2 Enter the desired slot and port number 3 Select the code Up or Down in the Send FT1 Loopback field 4 Highlight Send under Command in the Send Ft1 Loopback row Then press Return to start the test The code will be sent for up to 10 seconds or until an acknowledgement is received from the remote end 5 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column The following tests cannot be running when a V 54 test is initiated m A Send Pattern Test Send Remote Line Loopback Payload Loopback or Repeater Loopback on the interface to which the port is assigned m DTE Payload Loopback Send Pattern Test or Send V 54 Loopback on the same port 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 9 31 Troubleshooting Sending and Monitoring Pattern Tests The pattern tests enable a T1 access unit either to send or monitor a known bit pattern These tests generate industry standard bit patterns that can be used to determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit These industry standard and user defined patterns can be sent by the Network 1 or 2 and DSX 1 interfaces as well as the Sync Data ports toward the Network or DSX 1 interface and the OCU DP ports B gt Procedure To send monitor a Pattern Test 1 Voice Port Tests 9 32 Follow this menu selection sequ
248. ocol Options 1 of 3 Node IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the IP address needed to access the node Since this IP address is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a logical management link 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Shows the IP address for the node which you can view or edit The first digit i e xxx 255 255 255 cannot be 0 or 127 or greater than 223 However 000 is valid representing a null address Clear Clears the Node IP address and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 Node Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Node Subnet Mask Specifies the subnet mask needed to access the node Since this subnet mask is not bound to a particular port it can be used for remote access via a logical management link 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Shows the subnet mask for the node which you can view or edit Clear Clears the node subnet mask and fills the address with zeros When the node subnet mask is all zeros i e 000 000 000 000 the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 67 Setting Up 5 68 Table 5 14 Communication
249. oes not appear if Port Type is set to Asynchronous Internal The COM port uses internal clocking External The COM port uses external clocking Data Rate Kbps Possible Settings 9 6 14 4 19 2 28 8 38 4 57 6 115 2 Default Setting 19 2 Specifies the bits per second rate for the COM port Data Rate Kbps does not appear if Port Type is set to Synchronous and Clock Source is set to External 9 6 Sets the COM port rate to 9600 bps 14 4 Sets the COM port rate to 14 400 bps 19 2 Sets the COM port rate to 19 200 bps 28 8 Sets the COM port rate to 28 800 bps Running above 28 8 may cause problems on older PCs 38 4 Sets the COM port rate to 38 400 bps CAUTION The following speeds 57 6 and 115 2 Kbps are intended to be used for FTP file transfers only If you configure one of these rates be sure to use the standard 14 COM port cable or an equivalent short low capacitance cable 57 6 Sets the COM port rate to 57 600 bps 115 2 Sets the COM port rate to 115 200 bps April 1998 5 53 Setting Up Table 5 10 Communication Port Options 3 of 5 Character Length Possible Settings 7 8 Default Setting 8 Specifies the number of bits needed to represent one character The character length must be set to 8 bits when using the communication port as the network communication link Character length defaults to 8 and cannot be changed if Po
250. of the ABCD bits that are being received from the T1 interface E Lead State Current status of the E lead On or Off M Lead State Current status of the M lead On or Off Trunk Cond CGA Displays the status of trunk conditioning On for CGA Off for no CGA 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 3 Displaying System Information 7 4 View this field To find the For the FXO Voice APM Port Status Status of the port Assigned To Interface the port is assigned to Operating Mode Operating mode of the voice port that was configured using the Operating Mode configuration option on the Voice Ports screen See the Technical Reference for configuration information Signaling Type Type of signaling used by the voice port that was configured using the Signaling Type configuration option on the Voice Ports screen See the Technical Reference for configuration information Call Progress Current condition of the port TX ABCD bits Current value of the ABCD signaling bits that are being transmitted to the T1 interface RX ABCD bits Current value of the ABCD signaling bits that are being received from the T1 interface T R Control Current status of the tip and ring leads Loop Tip and Ring are connected together a Rgnd Ring lead is attached to ground Open Ring lead is not connected to either the Tip lead or the ground Lpgnd Tip and Ring are connected tog
251. oice Ports to DSX 1 or Network Interface Timeslots 5 44 Assigning Sync Data PDIS ee ct ences eee ERR RERE 5 44 Assigning OCU DP Data Ports ssssssllseesessseses 5 46 Clearing Port Assignments 0 020 e cece eee 5 47 Setting System OPONE ws se cnne cease rae RR RRRIDeRRRG Lea e eRER EY a 5 48 Setting User Interface Options escenas ii nasai ia aiaa a i a 5 52 Setting Up the Communication Port a s asasena anaana naaa 5 52 Setting Up the Communication Port to Support an External OMICS EE EEE EE F E PEPE E E A E E EET 5 57 Setting Up to Support a Telnet or FTP Session 5 61 Configuring for Alarms and Traps 020 tinerii raniti kiaiii 5 64 Setting Management and Communication Options 5 67 Setting Communication Protocol 0 ccc cee cece eee 5 67 Setting Up for SNMP Management 0 cece eee eens 5 70 Setting Up SNMP NMS Security 0 ccc eee eee eee 5 72 Setting Up tor SNMP Traps scu eR RR RERRRERRR oe 5 74 Setting Up and Placing a Call cece ed deed ee ett 5 78 Limiting ACCESS sei iee niea Baad d mc baad ghey xev lia ees 6 1 Limiting Async Terminal Direct AccesS 0000eeeeeeee 6 1 Limiting Telnet Access 00 cece eee eee eee ees 6 3 Controlling External Device Access 00 cece eee eae 6 4 Controlling SNMP ACCESS esses eru RR e Rhe emer eRERE es 6 5 Disabling SNMP ACCESS eden hende tn eed Bae es 6 5 Assigning
252. oints are also provided See Test Jacks on page 9 8 for more information on the test jacks 9161 Single T1 NAM Test Jack Functions DSX DSX NET NET In Out In Out TX O lt n T Eh Tout OQ O RX DSX iyd gt NET RX gt 00 Out Circuitry e In 0 TX DSX DSX NET NET MON MON 97 15195 01 Test Jack Name Function 9 DSX IN An intrusive test jack that allows a signal to be inserted a towards the equipment attached to the DSX 1 interface by 9 external test equipment 9 DSX OUT An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from the equipment attached to the DSX 1 interface and allows it Test to be terminated by external test equipment Jacks y HERE 4 9 DSX MON IN A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal going 29 DSX Monitor In into the terminal equipment DTE 2 DSX MON OUT A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the signal Z 9 DSX Monitor Out coming out of the terminal equipment DTE is NET IN An intrusive test jack that allows insertion of a signal toward Network In the network by external test equipment NET OUT An intrusive test jack that interrupts the signal coming from Network Out the network and allows it to be terminated by external test equipment NET MON IN A monitor jack that noninstrusively monitors the transmitted Network Monitor In signal going into the network This is a composite of the channels allocated to the network N
253. ol COM Port Call Setup 8 6 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Operation and Maintenance Changing Directory Numbers Use the COM Port Call Directories screen to change the phone number contained in a selected directory The T1 access unit ships with all directory phone numbers blank p Procedure To change directory phone numbers 1 Use the following menu selection sequence Main Menu Control gt COM Port Call Directories 2 To select the directory to be changed press the number of the desired directory 1 through 5 or A for Alarm and press Return The phone number for that directory appears Review or change the phone number Enter a number of up to 40 characters Make sure only valid characters are entered when changing the phone number Valid characters Numbers 0 9 Lowercase letters a z Uppercase letters A Z Space _ character ASCII symbols with the exception of the caret Control sequence using the caret Press Ctrl a to switch to the screen function key area To save changes select Save and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the Screen Changing Device Name 9161 A2 GH30 30 Use the Device Name screen to change the Device Name System Name System Location System Contact Use any ASCII characters Your entry in each field will overwrite existing information Use Clear to erase all characters in the current fiel
254. ollowing test tones are available to send to interface or to the user DRS Digital Reference Signal a 1004 Hz 0 0 dBm tone m Quiet No signal is sent gt Procedure To start and stop a Test Tone 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Test Voice Port Tests 2 Enter the desired slot and port number 3 Highlight either Send to T1 Interface or Send to User and select either Quiet or DRS for each field 4 Highlight Start under Command in the row to send a test Then press Return to start the test 5 View the length of time that the test has been running in the Results column 6 Highlight Stop under Command to stop the test The following tests cannot be running when a Test Tone is initiated m Any loopbacks on the same port m Another type of test tone other than the one currently running on the same interface 9 34 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Force and Monitor Signaling 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Force and Monitor signaling enables you to send and receive the following to from the T1 interface to which the selected port is assigned You can force these fields To these settings ABCD bits Tx and Rx for ESF framing or AB bits Tx and Rx for D4 framing User specified values Set Tip and Ring Leads To For FXO For FXS Loop Tip and Ring are connected together Rgnd Ring lead is attached to ground Open Ring lead is not connected to either the Ti
255. om the T1 access unit after you upgrade to a new release of software p Procedure To copy configuration files from the T1 access unit 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are backing up Type bin to enter binary mode 2 3 Type cd system to change to the system directory 4 Type get filename to perform a get of the desired file s 5 Type quit to exit the FTP session B gt Procedure To restore configuration files to the T1 access unit 1 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are backing up Type bin to enter binary mode 2 3 Type cd system to change to the system directory 4 Type put filename to perform a get of the desired file s 5 Type quit to exit the FTP session 8 12 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Operation and Maintenance Resetting the T1 Access Unit You can reset the T1 access unit in four ways Reset it from the Control menu to perform a self test m Cycle the power to perform a self test m Reset the configuration options to reestablish connectivity with the user interface m Setthe MIB from NMS Resetting the T1 Access Unit from the Control Menu Use this procedure to initiate a power on selftest of the unit This procedure also resets the T1 access unit p Procedure To reset the T1 access unit from the Control menu 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu Control Reset Device 2 Select Yes The T1 access unit reinitializes itself
256. on 10 ms Possible Settings 1 99 Default Setting 20 Determines the duration of the wink signal generated towards the network when an off hook signal for the CO is detected and after the wink delay has elapsed in increments of 10 milliseconds Wink Duration only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Operating Mode is set to FXODN WINK or DPT 10 to 990 ms The valid range is from 10 to 990 ms in 10 ms increments The settings are numbers between 1 and 99 representing such increments The default is 20 for a wink duration of 200 ms 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 27 Setting Up Table 5 5 FXO Voice Slot ss Port p Options 3 of 3 Rx Gain dB Possible Settings 10 00 9 5 9 0 8 5 0 0 0 5 1 0 1 5 42 0 Default Setting 0 0 Determines the receive path analog signal amplification or gain on the FXO voice port in decibels This is the gain increased signal level or attenuation decreased signal level applied to the signal Rx Gain dB only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 10 00 to 2 0 Increases or decreases the signal level The more positive the number the greater the signal level Tx Attenuation dB Possible Settings 10 00 9 5 9 0 8 5 0 0 44 0 4 5 45 0 Default Setting 0 0 Determines the amount of attenuation in dB that the FXO voice port applies to the analog signal presented by the
257. on at any synchronous data port that has the EDL set to Enable Alarm Indication Signal AIS received at either the Network or DSX 1 interface Excessive Error Rate EER detected at the Network interface Excessive Error Rate EER detected at any synchronous data port that has Embedded Data Link set to Enable see Table 5 3 Primary or Secondary Clock Failure Failure of an APM An APM is inserted that does not match the configuration Abnormal Station Code on any OCU DP port DDS Network Failure on any OCU DP port Loss of Loop Timing on any OCU DP port Enable Activates alarm conditions on the system alarm relay when an alarm condition occurs Disable Does not activate alarm conditions on the system alarm relay when an alarm condition occurs 5 66 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Setting Management and Communication Options Use the Management and Communication Options to set up m Communication Protocol m General SNMP Management m SNMP NMS Security m SNMP Traps m Telnet FTP Setting Communication Protocol Use the Communication Protocol Options see Table 5 14 to specify what is needed to support the IP communication network Configuration Edit Display Management and Communication gt Communication Protocol NOTE Be sure to choose an operational link for the default Should the default link become disabled unrouteable data will be discarded Table 5 14 Communication Prot
258. on the COM port external device to send an SNMP trap message p Procedure 1 Assign SNMP Trap Managers See Setting Up SNMP NMS Security in Chapter 5 Setting Up 2 Select desired SNMP traps Main Menu gt Configuration Management and Communication gt SNMP Traps 3 Configure the phone directories for dialing out alarms via the Control COM Port Call Setup branch Set up the A directory as the primary alarm directory You can also set up an alternate directory refer to Displaying Directory Numbers on page 8 6 and Changing Directory Numbers on page 8 7 4 Specify the IP address es of the NMS to send traps to when dialing out Use the Configuration Management and Communication SNMP NMS Security branch refer to Appendix C SNMP Traps 5 Enable the Call Retry and Alarm amp Trap Dial Out configuration options to hold the call if it cannot be completed The call is held until completed or the maximum retry count maximum 5 has been exceeded You can also set the delay time and specify an alternate directory if desired Follow this menu selection sequence to display the Load Configuration From Screen Main Menu Configuration Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 April 1998 8 5 Operation and Maintenance 6 Follow this menu selection sequence pressing Return after each selection Configuration Edit Display Alarm The Alarm Options screen appears 7 Select and
259. on to the asynchronous terminal interface on the COM port Login Required does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms Enable Requires a user ID and password to access the asynchronous terminal interface Disable Does not require a user ID and password to access the asynchronous terminal interface Port Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1 Specifies level of user access privilege for the asynchronous terminal interface Port Access Level does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms Level 1 Allows full access and control of the device including monitoring diagnostics and configuration The user can add change and display configuration options save and perform device testing Level 2 Allows limited access and control of the device The user can monitor and perform diagnostics display status and configuration options information Level 3 Allows limited access with monitoring control only The user can monitor and display status and configuration screens only Inactivity Timeout Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user session is disconnected after a specified time of inactivity no keyboard activity Inactivity Timeout does not appear if Port Use is set to Net Link or Alarms NOTE Changing this setting does not affect the current session it changes all subs
260. onfig management trap IP Address Destination General Traps Enterprise Specific Traps Link Traps Link Traps Interfaces Set Read devTrapMgrlpAddress devTrapMgrDestination devConfigTrapEnable devConfigTrapEnable devConfigTrapEnable ifLinkUpDownTrapEnable for the interface 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 D 15 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 16 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main control device_name System Name System Contact System Location Set Read sysName object from the System group sysContact object from the System group sysLocation object from the System group System Alarm Relay Cut Off Set Read devConfigAlarmRelayCutoff Reset Set devHWControlReset to reset April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments COM Port The COM communications port connects to an async terminal or other management interface These cables are m 14 foot 26 AWG 8 conductor with a non keyed 8 position modular jack interface connector at one end and m 25 pin or 9 pin connector at the other end depending upon the management interface used Refer to the appropriate cable section The following table shows the signals and pin assignments for the COM port interface connector Signal Direction Pin DCE Transmit Clock TXC O
261. onnected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXS Loop Start interface ABCD 1111 FXOl busy 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 41 Setting Up 5 42 Table 5 8 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 2 of 2 Network Side Value Meaning DSX 1 Side Default Value FXOD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXODN interface ABCD 0000 FXSD idle FXOD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXODN interface ABCD 1111 FXSD busy FXSD idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 0000 FXOD idle FXSD busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an FXSDN interface ABCD 1111 FXOD busy PLAR3idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for a PLAR D3 interface ABCD 0000 PLARSidle PLAR3busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the busy state for an PLAR D3 interface ABCD 1111 PLAR3busy PLAR4idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent t
262. onnectors They are all straight through cables i e Pin 1 on the voice APM side is Pin 1 on the M66 block side of the cable and they coincide with the pins on the 50 pin APM connector The following table identifies these cables indicates the voice APM it is used with and describes when you might use each Extension Cables 4 Amphenol plugs connector assembly Twisted pair T1 R1 124 R24 TR1 RR1 TR24 RR24 M1 E1 M24 E24 SG1 SG1 SG3 SG3 Extension Cable Length Voice APM When Used 1 Amphenol plug to 3 E amp M To connect the voice APM s 50 pin 1 Amphenol plug FXO Amphenol connector to the M66 block cable FXS d 1 When the M66 block is further than five Twisted pair 25 pair feet from the APM connector used as an 1 26 2 27 3 28 extension to the 5 foot cable normally 25 50 used See FXO FXS Voice APM Connector on Page E 12 or E amp M Voice APM Connector on Page E 13 for pin assignments 1 Amphenol socket 25 E amp M When the M66 block is further than five to 1 Amphenol plug FXO feet from the APM s connector used as cable FXS an extension to the 5 foot 1 Amphenol Twisted pair 25 pair plug to 1 Amphenol plug cable 1 26 2 27 2 28 See FXO FXS Voice APM Connector on 25 50 Page E 12 or E amp M Voice APM Connector on Page E 13 for pin assignments 3 Amphenol plugs to 6 FXO To condense three voice APMs onto the 1 Amphenol plug FXS single M66 block connector co
263. oop Start Loop Start Fwd Disc Ground Start Default Setting Loop Start Determines the type of signaling for the FXO voice port Signaling Type only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Operating Mode is not set to DPT Loop Start Enables the signaling used for basic telephone service stations simple PBX trunks or key systems Loop Start Fwd Disc Enables the signaling used for automated answering equipment Ground Start Enables the signaling used for two way PBX trunks Helps to prevent glaring i e call collision Terminating Impedance ohms Possible Settings 600 900 Default Setting 600 Determines the terminating impedance in ohms for the port Terminating Impedance only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 600 The terminating impedance is 600 ohms 900 The terminating impedance is 900 ohms Wink Delay 10 ms Possible Settings 1 99 Default Setting 15 Determines the amount of delay before the wink signal is generated towards the network and when an off hook signal from the CO is detected in increments of 10 milliseconds Wink Delay only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Operating Mode is set to FXODN WINK or DPT 10 to 990 The valid range is from 10 to 990 ms in 10 ms increments The settings are numbers between 1 and 99 representing such increments The default is 15 for a wink delay of 150 ms Wink Durati
264. oopback tests are available for the OCU DP APM m Latching Loopback applicable only to the 64 Clear Channel DDS 64KCC rate m Nonlatching Loopback applicable only to the DDS rate of 56K m OCU Loopback m DS 0 Loopback m Line Loopback m Data Loopback 9 38 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 DDS CSU DSU Latching Nonlatching Loopback 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting The Latching Nonlatching Loopback sends the selected loopback sequence to the CPE attached to the port Allows testing of a local loop between the selected port and the CPE Loopback This loopback running at types Direction Latching 64K Clear Channel CSU or DSU up or down Nonlatching 56K CSU or DSU DSU Latching and Nonlatching OCU T1 Loopback APM NAM Network Interface CSU Latching and Nonlatching Loopback 98 15958 The following tests are the only tests allowed to run at the same time as a Latching Nonlatching Loopback No other tests can be running when a Latching Nonlatching Loopback test is initiated m Send Pattern Monitor Pattern Test on any data port assigned to this interface April 1998 9 39 Troubleshooting OCU Loopback The OCU Loopback loops the data received from the T1 interface for the selected port back to the T1 interface OCU T1 APM NAM OCU Loopback lt OCU All Network Port 1s Interface 98 15959 The following test is the only test allowed to run at the same t
265. or testELeads for interface devDS1TestControl and send Pttn for interface devDS1TestControl and mon Pttn for interface devSyncDataTestControl and send Pttn for interface devSyncDataTestControl and mon Pttn for interface devOcuTestControl and send Pitn for interface devOcuTestControl and mon Pttn for interface devControlTestStatus main status voice Call Progress Trunk Condition CGA Fully supported by MIB objects see test port voice and config voice port devVoiceStatusCallProgState devVoiceStatus TrunkCondInCGA main status cross_connect fully supported by devCrossConnect D 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Cross Reference Table D 1 SNMP MIB to User Interface Command Cross Reference 3 of 16 User Interface Command SNMP MIB Object main status performance network Telco Current Current Interval Timer ESF Error Events ES UAS SES BES CSS LOFC Telco Intervals ES UAS SES BES CSS LOFC For the network interface Read value in dsx1TimeElapsed dsx1TelcoCurrentEvent dsx1CurrentES dsxiCurrentUAS dsx1CurrentSES dsx1CurrentBES dsx1CurrentCSS dsx1CurrentLOFC Select interval number with dsx1IntervalNumber Read value in dsx1IntervalES dsx1IntervalUAS dsx1IntervalSES dsx1IntervalBES dsx1IntervalCSS Select interval number with devTelcolntervalNumber then Read value in devTelcolntervalLOFC 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 D 3 SNMP Cross
266. or Alarm the Default Network Destination is forced to None Net Link The COM port is the network communication link to the IP network or IP device port CAUTION If Net Link is used with an external modem attached to the COM port be aware of the potential security risk of unwanted access to the NMS or to other devices on the LAN to which the access device has routing table entries for subnet or host routes Alarm The COM port is the ASCII alarm message port April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 10 Communication Port Options 2 of 5 Port Type Possible Settings Asynchronous Synchronous Default Setting Asynchronous Specifies whether the port transmits synchronous or asynchronous data Asynchronous The port uses asynchronous communication Synchronous The port uses synchronous communication Synchronous is only valid when Port Use is set to Net Link Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Specifies whether the port uses internal or external clocking when the COM port is set for synchronous transmission For synchronous operation the COM port is always defined as a DCE This configuration option reverses the direction of the clock TXC and RXC interchange circuits and allows the COM port to accept clocking from an external device Connection to another DCE requires the use of a crossover cable Clock Source d
267. or the DSX 1 side the default value displayed is based on a typical setting that would be used with the corresponding Network side value Typical pairs of values are shown in the table below If you change the setting of None to anything else the DSX side value is changed to the corresponding default value April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Table 5 8 Signaling and Trunk Conditioning Values 1 of 2 Setting Up Network Side Value Meaning DSX 1 Side Default Value None No signaling used on this DSO Use this setting if there is no voice signaling information being passed on this DSO clear channel None RBS default Robbed Bit Signaling is used on this DSO but no trunk conditioning Signaling bits will be passed to the T1 interface to which this DSO is cross connected when this T1 interface is not in CGA but the signaling bits will be all ones when CGA is present RBS The following values will configure the cross connect for RBS as well as perform the trunk conditioning indicated when a CGA condition occurs Although the ABCD signaling bits for each setting are described only AB bits are transmitted when the cross connected T1 interface is using D4 framing E amp M idle The signaling bits transmitted to the cross connected T1 interface during a CGA represent the idle state for an E amp M interface ABCD 0000 E amp M idle E amp M busy The signaling bits transmitted to the cross
268. ort 10 E Lead 32 T Port 1 P4 36 T Port 11 Transmit Tip 33 T1 Port 1 P5 36 T1 Port 11 Receive Tip 34 E Port 1 P6 36 E Port 11 E Lead 35 T Port 1 P4 37 T Port 12 Transmit Tip 36 T1 Port 1 P5 37 T1 Port 12 Receive Tip 37 E Port 1 P6 37 E Port 12 E Lead 38 T Port 1 P4 38 T Port 13 Transmit Tip 39 T1 Port 1 P5 38 T1 Port 13 Receive Tip 40 E Port 1 P6 38 E Port 13 E Lead 41 T Port 1 P4 39 T Port 14 Transmit Tip 42 T1 Port 1 P5 39 T1 Port 14 Receive Tip 43 E Port 1 P6 39 E Port 14 E Lead 44 T Port 1 P4 40 T Port 15 Transmit Tip 45 T1 Port 1 P5 40 T1 Port 15 Receive Tip 46 E Port 1 P6 40 E Port 15 E Lead 47 T Port 1 P4 41 T Port 16 Transmit Tip 48 T1 Port 1 P5 41 T1 Port 16 Receive Tip 49 E Port 1 P6 41 E Port 16 E Lead 50 SB P7 34 41 SB Signal Battery Ports 1 8 Ports 9 16 E 22 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments 3 Amphenol Plugs to 4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P3 1 of 2 P3 Pin Designation Connects To Pin Designation Function 1 R Port 1 P4 17 R Port 17 Transmit Ring 2 R1 Port 1 P5 17 R1 Port 17 Receive Ring 3 M Port 1 P6 17 M Port 17 M Lead 4 R Port 2 P4 18 R Port 18 Transmit Ring 5 R1 Port 2 P5 18 R1 Port 18 Receive Ring 6 M Port 2 P6 18 M Port 18 M L
269. oubleshooting 9161 A2 GH30 30 Table 9 1 ASCII Alarm Messages 5 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Priority month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Yellow alarm signal at the Network1 Network 2 Interface or at the DSX 1 Interface in slot ss port p month day year The primary clock 1 If the primary clock 22 hours minutes seconds source has failed The was derived from A Primary Clock Source System is operating the network Failure has occurred from the secondary contact the network clock source provider 2 Check the clock source Contact your service representative month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for a Primary Source Failure month day year The secondary clock 1 If the secondary 21 hours minutes seconds source has failed The clock was derived A Secondary Clock Source system is operating from the network Failure has occurred from the internal clock contact the network provider 2 Check the clock source Contact your service representative month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for a Secondary Source Failure month day year A continuous There is a network 18 hours minutes seconds out of frame condition problem with the A 64KCC Loop Out of occurred on the frac
270. ow remote control of a device m Network loopbacks are defined in AT amp T TR 62411 m The LLB up code invokes a line loopback in the remote unit while the LLB down code terminates the line loopback in the remote unit The following tests cannot be running when a remote loopback test is initiated m All loopbacks on this Network or DSX 1 interface m Send Pattern Test on this interface or any data port assigned to this interface m Send Remote Line Loopback on this interface m Send V 54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any data port assigned to this interface m Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to this interface p Procedure 9 26 To start and stop a Remote Loopback 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test Network Tests 2 Select the desired Network interface 1 for 9161 NAM 1 or 2 for 9261 NAM 3 Select the code Up or Down in the Send Line Loopback field 4 Highlight Send under Command in the Send Line Loopback row Then press Return to start the test The code will be sent for 10 seconds April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Sending and Monitoring Pattern Tests The pattern tests enable a T1 access unit either to send or monitor a known bit pattern These tests generate industry standard bit patterns that can be used to determine whether information is being correctly transmitted across a circuit p Procedure To 1 send monitor a Pattern Test Follow this menu selection
271. own devOcuRate devOcuLoopbackDetection main config cross connect DSX 1 to Network Assignments Network to Network Assignments Voice Port Assignments Sync Data Port Assignments OCU DP Port Assignments Clear DSX 1 Time Slots Clear Network Interface Time Slots Clear Slot nn Fully supported by the device cross connect MIB objects using devDs1FracTable devDs1FracTable devDs1FracTable devSyncDataPortAssignTable devDs1FracTable Use devDs1FracTable to clear all time slots Use devDs1FracTable to clear all time slots Use devDs1FracTable to clear all time slots main config system Test Timeout Test Duration Primary Clock Source Secondary Clock Source Set Read devConfigTestTimeout devConfigTestDuration devConfigClockSrcTable read only devConfigClockSrcTable read only main config user com COM Port Port Usage Port Type Data Rate Character Length Parity Stop Bits Ignore Control Leads Clock Source Set Read devPortUsage to netlink alarm or terminal See the Asynchronous Synchronous Port Table for the entry rs232PortInSpeed or rs232PortOutSpeed for the port rs232AsyncPortBits for the port rs232AsyncPortParity for the port rs232AsyncPortStopBits for the port rs232PortinFlowType for the port rs232SyncPortClockSource to internal or external main config management security IP Address Access Type Set Read devSecurityMgrlpAddress devSecurityMgrAccess to read or readWrite main c
272. p lead or the ground Lpgnd Tip and Ring are connected together and Tip is connected to ground RbTo A 48 Vdc battery is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is open RbTg A 48 Vdc battery is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded TbRg A 48 Vdc battery is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded Ring Ringing voltage applied between Tip and Ring Set E lead to E amp M APM only On Off April 1998 9 35 Troubleshooting 9 36 You can monitor these fields At these settings ABCD bits Tx and Rx for ESF framing or AB bits Tx and Rx for D4 framing Whatever value is currently set Tip and Ring Leads State For FXO For FXS ToRo Attached device has both Tip and Ring leads open TgRo Attached device has Tip lead grounded and Ring lead open TgR Attached device has Tip lead grounded and Ring lead state is unknown ToR Attached device has Tip lead open and Ring lead state is unknown RoT Attached device has Ring lead open and Tip lead state is unknown RbTo A battery is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is open RbTg A battery is applied to the Ring lead and the Tip lead is grounded TbRg A battery is applied to the Tip lead and the Ring lead is grounded Ring Ringing voltage applied between Tip and Ring RbTo Ring Lead connected to nominal 48Vdc battery and Tip lea
273. p manager s Enable Sends trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events Disable Does not send trap messages for enterpriseSpecific events 5 76 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 17 SNMP Trap Options 3 of 3 Link Traps Possible Settings Disable Up Down Both Default Setting Both Determines whether SNMP linkDown or linkUp traps are sent to the currently configured trap manager s A linkDown trap indicates that the T1 access unit recognizes a failure in one of the communication interfaces A linkUp trap indicates that the unit recognizes one of its communication interfaces is active Use the Link Traps Interface configuration option to specify which interface will monitor linkUp and linkDown traps messages Disable Does not send linkDown or linkUp trap messages Up Sends SNMP trap messages for linkUp events Down Sends SNMP trap messages for linkDown events Both Sends SNMP trap messages for linkUp and linkDown events Link Traps Interfaces Possible Settings Network DSX 1 T1s Ports All Default Setting All Specifies which interface monitors and generates linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific trap messages NOTE These traps are supported on the T1 interfaces synchronous data ports and OCU ports only They are not supported for the voice ports or communication port Network Generates trap messages for linkUp linkDown and enterpriseSpecific eve
274. performing a Device Self Test Restoring Access to the User Interface Misconfiguring the T1 access unit could render the user interface inaccessible leaving it in a state where a session cannot be started via the COM port or a Telnet session If this occurs T1 access unit connectivity can be restored via a directly connected terminal Two methods can be used to restore access to the user interface m Reset COM Port Allows you to reset the configuration options related to COM port usage This also causes a device reset where the T1 access unit performs a Device Self Test No security related configuration options are changed m Reload Factory Defaults Allows you to reload the Default Factory Configuration resetting all of the configuration and control settings This method is also useful when the user s password s have been forgotten Selecting this method also causes a device reset Reload destroys the current configuration 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 8 13 Operation and Maintenance B gt Procedure To reset COM port settings 1 Attach the async terminal to the COM port 2 At the async terminal configure the terminal to operate at 19 2 kbps using character length of 8 bits with one stop bit and no parity 3 Ensure that any hardware or software flow control is disabled 4 Reset the T1 access unit then immediately and repeatedly press Return at a rate of at least 1 press per second until the System Paused scree
275. plication allows customers to use existing modems while reducing the cost of using them by eliminating access lines The T1 access unit supports up to three 8 port E amp M APMs A typical application consists of Modem Lines Eight lines m FEP CC 128 kbps m Router 896 kbps E amp M is used to transport the analog information and no E amp M signaling is involved In fact the E amp M signaling leads are disconnected in this application the operating mode is set to Transmit Only See Chapter 4 Setting Up for more information on configuring voice ports Cluster Controller Downtown HQ FEP Terminal T1 Access Unit Router E amp M Mainframe APL Modems gt Suburban Office 497 15191 01 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and APL 3 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Applications T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data FXS and E amp M 9161 A2 GH30 30 In the example shown in the following diagram data and regular voice traffic are transported by the T1 access unit and the APL modem E amp M type voice in Transmit mode only is being used to transport the APL modem traffic while FXS is employed to transmit regular voice traffic Another variation of this application would have the lines connected to the telephones terminate at a switch in the cloud where they could be connected to any other telephone in the world Downtown HQ Cluste
276. ppear if Line Framing Format is set to D4 EDL on any synchronous data port is set to Enable DDL Uses DDL as the management link DDL does not appear if all network time slots are assigned IP Address Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the internet protocol address for the management link IP Address only appears if Management Link is set to FDL or DDL 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 The IP address for the management link which you can view or edit The first digit i e xxx 255 255 255 cannot be 0 or 127 or greater than 223 However 000 000 000 000 is valid representing a null address Clear Resets the IP address and fills the address with zeros Subnet Mask Possible Settings 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Default Setting 000 000 000 000 Specifies the subnet mask for the management link Subnet Mask only appears if Management Link is set to FDL or DDL 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 The subnet mask for the management link which you can view or edit Clear Resets the node subnet mask and fills the address with zeros i e 000 000 000 000 When the subnet mask is all zeros the IP protocol creates a default subnet mask based on the class of the IP address Class A 255 000 000 000 Class B 255 255 000 000 or Class C 255 255 255 000 5 10 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30
277. r FEP Controller T1 Access Unit Router Mainframe 497 15192 01 Modems Warehouse T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data FXS and E amp M Transmit Only Mode April 1998 3 5 Applications T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and Drop amp Insert In the example shown in the following diagram voice and data are mixed The Drop and Insert feature of the T1 access unit allows voice information to be sent from a remote site to a large site that contains a digital PBX People at the distant end can make calls Multiple routers and data lines require adding a Sync Data APM to the T1 access unit because more than two data ports are needed Service Router Headquarters T1 Access Unit Router T1 or DSX 1 Mainframe Drop and Insert Digital Regional Office PBX 97 15193 01 T1 Access Unit with High Speed Data and Drop amp Insert 3 6 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Applications Channel Bank Replacement and Additions 9161 A2 GH30 30 In the example shown in the following diagram the T1 access unit is a replacement for a channel bank The T1 access unit is more than just a replacement for a channel bank It can do many things that a channel bank cannot do A channel bank has no data ports it passes data as if it comes from external modems or DSUs The T1 access unit provides both data and voice ports A chann
278. r Interface Options 5 52 setting up considerations management configuration Signaling force and monitor 9 35 Signaling Type FXO FXS Slot Assignment information 7 10 IN 8 SNMP assigning community names access levels controlling MEE cross reference dialing out traps disabling ML limiting access through IP addresses management i User Interface Command Cross Reference D 1 System Identification Information 12 Traps authenticationFailure C 2 Enterprise Specific linkUp and seca warmstart traps supported 8 5 SNMP Management 1 5 70 setting up for SNMP MIB object test commands SNMP NMS Security setting up SNMP NMS Security options SNMP Trap options SNMP Traps 5 75 setting up software APM revision downloading 8 9 revision Spacebar specifications technical starting a session FA starting a test 9 43 startup Statistics network performance performance clearing performance displaying selecting performance intervals for display Sync data performance 7 13 statistics 1 10 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 status cross connect menu branch SNMP to user interface cross reference D 1 system 7 2 test voice APM Status Messages Stop Bits 5 54 stopping a test subnet assigning IP addresses and masks B 7 routing using different B 5 routing using same Subnet Mask switching between screen areas 4 8 Sync Data Performance S
279. r T1 access unit is currently configured m Security access level The security level set by the system administrator for each user m Data selection criteria What you entered in previous fields or screens Screen Work Areas There are two user work areas m Screen area Where you input information into fields m Screen function key area Where you perform specific screen functions Following is a sample async terminal interface screen 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 4 3 User Interface Menu Path Device Name Screen Area Screen Function Key Area System Message Area 4 4 Access Level main Device Name Node A Access Level 1 Model Number Date and Time Company Name 9162 01 26 96 23 32 MAIN MENU Status Test Configuration Control Ctrl a to access these functions Save Screen Format Description Menu path Menu selections made to reach the current screen Device name Customer assigned identification of the system Access level Currently assigned security access level Company Name Vendor company name Model number xxxx The T1 access unit s model number 9162 9161 Single T1 NAM in 2 slot housing 9165 9161 Single T1 NAM in 5 slot housing 9262 9261 Dual T1 NAM in 2 slot housing 9265 9261 Dual T1 NAM in 5 slot housing 9161 9161 Single T1 NAM in 14 slot housing 9261 9261 Dual T1 NAM in 14 slot housing Da
280. ransmit Tip 33 T1 Port 3 P5 44 T1 Port 19 Receive Tip 34 E Port 3 P6 44 E Port 19 E Lead 35 T Port 4 P4 45 T Port 20 Transmit Tip 36 T1 Port 4 P5 45 T1 Port 20 Receive Tip 37 E Port 4 P6 45 E Port 20 E Lead 38 T Port 5 P4 46 T Port 21 Transmit Tip 39 T1 Port 5 P5 46 T1 Port 21 Receive Tip 40 E Port 5 P6 46 E Port 21 E Lead 41 T Port 6 P4 47 T Port 22 Transmit Tip 42 T1 Port 6 P5 47 T1 Port 22 Receive Tip 43 E Port 6 P6 47 E Port 22 E Lead 44 T Port 7 P4 48 T Port 23 Transmit Tip 45 T1 Port 7 P5 48 T1 Port 23 Receive Tip 46 E Port 7 P6 48 E Port 23 E Lead 47 T Port 8 P4 49 T Port 24 Transmit Tip 48 T1 Port 8 P5 49 T1 Port 24 Receive Tip 49 E Port 8 P6 49 E Port 24 E Lead 50 SB P7 42 49 SB Signal Battery Ports 1 8 Ports 17 24 E 24 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments OCU Port The OCU DP APM can have either two or six ports each port having an RJ48S connector Connect the OCU port to the DDS network using one of the following cables m 14 foot DDS cable m 25 foot DDS cable OCU Port Connector The OCU DP port is a USOC RJ48S connector The following table shows pin assignments and the purpose of each Function Circuit Pin Transmit ring R 1 Transmit tip T 2 Receive tip T1 7 Receive ring R1 8 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 E 25 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments T1
281. ransmit timing is derived from the current system clock source set using System Options see Table 5 9 Network Transmit timing is derived from this interface NOTE When Network is configured the clock must be synchronized to the system clock source ANSI Performance Report Messages Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether ANSI T1 403 compliance performance report messages PRMs are generated and sent to the network over the ESF FDL every second ANSI Performance Report Messages only appears if Line Framing Format is set to ESF Enable Generates and sends PRMs Disable Does not generate and send PRMs 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 9 Setting Up Table 5 1 Network Interface Options 4 of 7 Management Link Possible Settings Disable FDL DDL Default Setting Disable Specifies the network management link NOTES If both FDL and DDL are not available selections the configuration option is set to Disable and cannot be edited If Management Link for the local T1 access unit is set to FDL or DDL configure the remote T1 access unit with the same settings Disable Does not use the management link FDL Uses FDL as the management link FDL allows IP management traffic to flow over the 4 kbps data link provided by the FDL FDL requires an end to end FDL connection and cannot be terminated within the network FDL does not a
282. red for a Loss Of Signal LOS at OCU DP port in slot ss port p month day year The identified slot Ensure that the APM 8 hours minutes seconds previously contained a installed is the correct A Module Misconfiguration different type of APM type If it is not install condition was detected for the correct APM type slot ss The card needs to be accepted Refer to the Technical Reference for additional information if necessary month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for the Module Misconfiguration for slot ss month day year A power supply or fan 1 Check that the 1 hours minutes seconds tray problem is power supply or fan Power Supply Alarm detected on the tray is mounted condition detect system correctly in the housing 2 Contact your service representative month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for Power Alarm condition month day year A Yellow alarm signal 1 Check the Network 9 Net hours minutes seconds is detected on the and or DSX 1 10 DSX 1 Yellow alarm signal received at the Network 1 Network 2 Interface or at the DSX 1 Interface in slot ss port p specified Network or DSX 1 interface cable 2 Contact network provider for Network interface problem Check equipment for DSX 1 interface problem April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Tr
283. rn to start the test This field now displays the word Stop View the length of time that the test has been running in the Result column Highlight Stop under Command in the selected test s row Then press Return to stop the test This field now displays the word Start April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Line Loopback 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting The Line Loopback LLB loops the information received on the Network or DSX 1 interface back to the source of the loopback When used with a pattern test at the remote node LLB determines whether the problem is with the sending device or the T1 facility Port 1s Interface All 1s All 1s DCE DCE Port 2 Port 1 496 15197 The following tests cannot be running when a line loopback test is initiated Payload loopback on this Network or DSX 1 interface Send Pattern Test on this Network or DSX 1 interface or any data port assigned to this interface Send Remote Line Loopback on this Network or DSX 1 interface Send V 54 or Send FT1 Loopback on any port assigned to this Network or DSX 1 interface Data Channel Loopback on any data port assigned to this Network or DSX 1 interface CAUTION Line Loopback may affect the operation of the FDL DDL or EDL Any IP data being sent while this test is active will be disrupted Also any performance statistics being sent over the EDL will be disrupted April 1998 9 23 Troubleshooting Payload Loopback The Payload
284. rnal management m Telnet access to an asynchronous terminal interface Over the T1 access units COM port through the ESF Facility Data Link FDL via an associated EDL EDL or Direct Data Link DDL m SNMP SNMP manager s using the SNMP protocol to configure and control the unit using standard MIBs and enterprise specific MIB extensions Logins Refer to Chapter 6 Security to learn how to create and delete logins 5 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Adding System Identity Information Use the Device Name screen to identify this system and to change or display the general name location and contact for the system p Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Control Device Name 2 Use the Tab key to move the cursor to the field where you want to add or change information NOTE To clear existing information place the cursor in the Clear field and press Return Iftheselectionis Enter the Device Name Unique name for device identification of up to 20 characters System Name SNMP system name can be up to 255 characters System Location Your system s physical location can be up to 255 characters System Contact Name and how to contact the person responsible for this System can be up to 255 characters 3 To save changes select Save and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears in the message area at the bottom of the
285. rt gt Technical Manuals April 1998 xi About This Guide Reference Documents CSA 22 2 No 950 CSA 108 M1983 FCC Part 15 UL 1950 Management Information Base for Network Management of TCP IP Based Internets MIBII RFC 1213 March 1991 Definitions of Managed Objects for the DS1 and E1 Interface Types RFC 1406 January 1993 Evolution of the Interfaces Group of MIB II RFC 1573 January 1994 Definitions of Managed Objects for RS 232 like Hardware Devices RFC 1659 July 1994 xii April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 About the T1 Access Mux Overview 9161 A2 GH30 30 The T1 Access Mux is the interface between your customer premises equipment and a T1 network The 916x 926x product line supports the following T1 Access Mux configurations m 9161 Single T1 NAM or 9261 Dual T1 NAM in a 2 slot housing m 9161 Single T1 NAM or 9261 Dual T1 NAM in a 5 slot housing 9161 Single T1 NAM or 9261 Dual T1 NAM in a 9000 Series Access Carrier All configurations are referred to as the T1 access unit in this document April 1998 1 1 1 2 Chapter ChapName Components The T1 access unit consists of either a 9161 or 9261 Network Access Module NAM installed in a two slot or five slot chassis along with optional Sync Data DSX or voice Application Modules APMs for particular applications Up to 14 NAMs can also be installed in the 14 slot access carrier ee Ground Screw Al and Label o v as
286. rt Use is set to Net Link and Port Type is set to Asynchronous 7 Sets the character length to seven bits 8 Sets the character length to eight bits You must use this setting if using the COM port as the network communication link Parity Possible Settings None Even Odd Default Setting None Provides a method of checking the accuracy of binary numbers for the COM port None Provides no Parity Even Makes the sum of all 1 bits in the character and its corresponding parity bit always even Odd Makes the sum of all 1 bits in the character and its corresponding parity bit always odd Stop Bits Possible Settings 1 1 5 2 Default Setting 1 Determines the number of stop bits used for the COM port 1 Provides one stop bit 1 5 Provides one and a half stop bits 2 Provides two stop bits Ignore Control Leads Possible Settings Disable DTR Default Setting Disable Specifies whether Data Terminal Ready DTR is used Disable Treats control leads as standard operation DTR Ignores DTR This may be necessary when connecting to some PAD Packet Assembly and Disassembly devices 5 54 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 10 Communication Port Options 4 of 5 Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether a user ID and password is required in order to log
287. s Lists SNMP traps SNMP Cross Reference Provides a cross reference of SNMP MIB objects and user interface commands Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Describes cables to be used with the T1 access unit as well as their connectors and pin assignments Technical Specifications Equipment List Lists related equipment Defines acronyms and terms used in this document Lists key terms acronyms concepts and sections in alphabetical order Convention Indicates Italic Variable information e g slot s indicating slot number 01 02 etc Menu selection sequence The selections to be made from a menu or selections from within a menu before performing a procedural step e g Main Menu Status System and Test Status Brackets Multiple selection choices e g Current Configuration Customer Configuration 1 Customer Configuration 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 About This Guide Product Related Documents Document Number Document Title 9161 A2 GH30 30 9000 A2 GN14 9000 A2 GN15 9000 A2 GN16 9000 A2 GN17 9000 A2 GN1A 9000 A2 GN1B 9000 A2 GN1C 9000 A2 GN1D 9000 A2 GX42 9109 A2 GN10 9109 A2 GN11 9109 A2 GN12 9109 A2 GN13 9109 A2 GN14 9109 A2 GN15 9161 A2 GK41 9161 A2 GK43 9161 A2 GL10 9161 A2 GN10 9261 A2 GN10 9261 A2 GZ10 2 Slot and 5 Slot Housing Wall Mounting Kit Installation Instructions 2 Slot Housing Installation Instructions 5 Slot Housing with AC Pow
288. s are sent to an ASCII terminal or printer attached to the communication port either locally or remotely via an external device CAUTION You should be sure to clear alarms as they occur by correcting the condition that caused the alarm Additional alarms will not be reported until the previous alarm is cleared Therefore if you do not clear an alarm a serious outage could occur and you will be unaware of it unless you are monitoring the unit via the user interface or SNMP m When set an alarm is sent at the start of an alarm condition m f more than one alarm condition exists only the highest priority alarm will be sent View Health and Status for all conditions m An Alarm Cleared message is sent when the alarm condition no longer exists 9 12 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting Table 9 1 lists the alarm messages and corresponding clear messages in alphabetical order Priority order is identified Each alarm message contains m Date and time month day year hours minutes seconds that the condition occurred or was cleared m The user configured device name m Alarm description m An identification of the affected interface when applicable Table 9 1 ASCII Alarm Messages 1 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Priority month day year An Abnormal Station 1 Check that the 17 hours minutes seconds Code from the network far end DSU is An Abnormal Station
289. s carrier access carrier parts APMs G 3 cables cabs et five slot housing 9161 Software Upgrade Kit manual power supplies T1 NAMs two slot housing wall mounting bracket features Field selecting types IN 4 file transfer File Transfer Protocol Five slot housing Force and Monitor Signaling front panel FTP session setting up to support FTP Login Required function keys area screen FXO Voice APM FXO voice port options 5 26 FXO voice ports configuring FXO FXS 50 Pin Amphenol Connector FXS FXS Voice APM FXS voice port options FXS voice ports configuring G gender adapter changer General SNMP Management options General Traps Generate Yellow Alarm Signals 5 48 H hardware revision APM System NAM 7 1 Health messages high speed data high speed data and APL high speed data and drop amp insert high speed data and E amp M high speed data and FXS hot swapping APMs housing access carrier five slot two slot 1 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 I Identity adding and displaying information Ignore Control Leads 5 54 Inactivity Timeout Inputting Selections interface async terminal user asynch terminal user access 4 1 interface tests 9 22 Interface Status DSX 1 Network 5 7 Invalid Character Password Test Already Active 9 18 Test Combination Invert Transmit and Received Data 5 18 Invert
290. s will be made to the equipment unless the changes or modifications are expressly approved by Paradyne A WARNING To Users of Digital Apparatus in Canada This Class A digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian interference causing equipment regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe A respecte toutes les exigences du r glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada 9161 A2 GH30 31 July 1998 B Important Regulatory Information Important Safety Instructions 1 Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in the manual 2 All installation and service must be performed by qualified service personnel as opening or removing covers may 10 expose dangerous voltage points or other risks This product is intended to be used with a 3 wire grounding type plug a plug which has a grounding pin This is a safety feature Equipment grounding is vital to ensure safe operation Do not defeat the purpose of the grounding type plug by modifying the plug or using an adapter Prior to installation use an outlet tester or a voltmeter to check the ac receptacle for the presence of earth ground If the receptacle is not properly grounded the installation must not continue until a qualified electrician has corrected the problem If a 3 wire grounding type power source is not available consult a qualified electrician to determine another method of grounding the equipment
291. scape in seconds During the delay no data is sent from the communication port Only used by the T1 access unit when External Device Commands is set to Other None No communication port escape delay x x The delay 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 used during the COM port s escape sequence This delay must be configured for a delay greater than or equal to the escape guard time required by the external device Escape Sequence Delay only appears if External Device Commands is set to Other April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 11 External Device COM Port Options 3 of 3 Disconnect String Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the command used to disconnect an external device Only used by the T1 access unit when External Device Commands is set to Other ASCII Text Field Adds to or changes the Disconnect String maximum 20 characters Refer to the Control Characters table on page 5 60 Clear Clears and sets the Disconnect String Disconnect String only appears if External Device Commands is set to Other April 1998 5 59 Setting Up 5 60 Control Characters Sequence ASCII Hex A ora SOH 0x01 B or b STX 0x02 C or c ETX 0x03 D or d EOT 0x04 E or e ENQ 0x05 F or f ACK 0x06 G or g BEL 0x07 H or h BS 0x08
292. se that are unassigned and the currently assigned timeslot Order of display is as follows Available is the first selection Then from lowest DSX 1 interface to the highest DSX 1 interface Then lowest available timeslot number to the highest available timeslot number For example if the cursor is on a field with the Available value under assigned timeslot Nxx pressing the Spacebar causes this field s values to cycle through all valid DSX 1 timeslots starting with Dss p yy assuming it is unassigned If Dss p yy is already assigned the next valid timeslot in the order described above is displayed April 1998 5 39 Setting Up B gt Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display Cross Connect DSX 1 to Network Assignments 2 The DSX 1 to Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current cross connect status of all time slots on the Network interface 3 If you are using the 9261 Dual T1 NAM you must choose which Network interface to use Enter 1 or 2 in the NETWORK field 4 Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired timeslot to display the desired timeslot assignment 5 Repeat Step 3 until all desired timeslots are assigned Select Save to save the assignments or press ESC to save and return to the Cross Connect menu DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning 5 40
293. set the following configuration options as appropriate To Set the configuration option Automatically initiate a call dial out Alarm amp Trap Dial Out to Enable Retry the call if the call cannot be Call Retry to Enable completed Dial Out Delay Time to the desired number of minutes Alternate Dial Out Directory to the desired directory Specify whether to disconnect Trap Disconnect to Enable immediately after dialing out traps or to allow a manual disconnect to occur A connection remains until manually disconnected 8 Press Cirl a to switch to the screen function key area 9 To save changes select Save and press Return 10 Select the configuration area where you want to save the changes to and press Return When Save is complete Command Complete appears at the bottom of the screen Maintaining COM Port Directories Two Control menu selections are dedicated to dialing a remote device for management Select To COM Port Call Setup Select a phone directory and view its phone number or to initiate and terminate external modem connections over the FrameSaver unit s COM port Used for management COM Port Call Directories Change the phone number contained in a selected directory when using an external modem Displaying Directory Numbers Use the COM Port Call Setup screen to display the telephone number of the remote device Main Menu Contr
294. settings that are different from the default setting Do this for each of the alternate configurations stored in Customer Configuration 1 and 2 as well Store these records for reference as needed 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 A 3 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Device Name atwo ee Table Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold Interface Status Enable Disable Line Framing Format D4 ESF Line Coding Format AMI B8ZS Line Build Out LBO 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Bit Stuffing 62411 Part68 Disable Network Initiated LLB Enable Disable Network Initiated PLB Enable Disable Transmit Timing System Network ANSI Performance Report Enable Disable Messages Management Link Disable FDL DDL IP Address 000 000 000 000 223 255 255 255 Clear Subnet Mask 000 000 000 000 255 255 255 255 Clear Routing Information Protocol None Proprietary Network Time Slot 01 24 lowest available time slot Circuit Identifier Text field Loss of Signal LOS Alarm Enable Disable Out of Frame OOF Alarm Enable Disable Alarm Indication Signal AIS Alarm Enable Disable Yellow Alarm Enable Disable Excessive Error Rate EER Alarm Enable Disable Excessive Error Rate Threshold 10E 4 10E 5 10E 6 10E 7 10E 8 10E 9 1 Read only when Network is set to 1 This first byte cannot be set to 0 nor 12
295. side on the right side of the table If you change the setting of None to anything else the Network 2 side value is changed to the corresponding default value 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 43 Setting Up Assigning Voice Ports to DSX 1 or Network Interface Timeslots Use the Voice Port Assignments screen to view the status of all DSO assignments on the Network or DSX 1 interface You can also use this screen to assign voice ports to selected timeslots NOTE You can assign voice ports to the DSX 1 interface on the 9161 Single T1 NAM Voice port assignments on the Dual DSX APM are not supported p Procedure 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display Cross Connect gt Voice Port Assignment 2 The Cross Connect menu appears Select Voice Port Assignment and press Return The Voice Port Assignments screen appears 3 Enter Net1 Net2 or DSX01 1 into the Assign To field to assign voice ports to the Network 1 Network 2 or DSX 1 interface respectively 4 Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired slot and port Repeat this step until all desired timeslots are assigned 5 Select Save to save the assignments or press ESC to save and return to the Cross Connect menu Assigning Sync Data Ports Use the Sync Data Port Assignments screen to view the status of m All DSO assignments on the Network interface m All DSO assignments on the DSX 1 interfac
296. slot 01 to 24 Netn yy Network n 1 or 2 time slot yy is assigned to the Network Interface time slot 01 to 24 using Clear Channel Netn yyr Network n 1 or 2 time slot yy is assigned to the Network Interface time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 7 Displaying System Information 7 8 bottom The Cross Connect Status Field Indicates Dss plyy The DSX 1 on slot ss port p time slot yy is assigned to the Network Interface time slot 01 to 24 Dss p yyr The DSX 1 on slot ss port p time slot yy is assigned to the Network Interface time slot 01 to 24 using Robbed Bit Signaling r RsvdAPM The time slot is assigned to an APM which is either m failed m removed or not installed or has been replaced by an APM type that is not compatible with the configuration DDL The time slot is reserved for a management path using Direct Data Link DDL Slot Assignment information NAM or APM physical slot assignment information appears below the time slot fields The following information is available for viewing Physical Slot Identifies the assigned card type 01 to 14 based on model T1 NAM T1 NAM Empty The slot is empty 02 to 05 based on model Sync Data 4 port synchronous data APM DSX 1 2 port Dual DSX APM E amp M Voice 8 port E amp M Voice AP
297. smit Tip 30 T1 Port 2 P5 27 T1 Port 2 Receive Tip 31 E Port 2 P6 27 E Port 2 E Lead 32 T Port 3 P4 28 T Port 3 Transmit Tip 33 T1 Port 3 P5 28 T1 Port 3 Receive Tip 34 E Port 3 P6 28 E Port 3 E Lead 35 T Port 4 P4 29 T Port 4 Transmit Tip 36 T1 Port 4 P5 29 T1 Port 4 Receive Tip 37 E Port 4 P6 29 E Port 4 E Lead 38 T Port 5 P4 30 T Port 5 Transmit Tip 39 T1 Port 5 P5 30 T1 Port 5 Receive Tip 40 E Port 5 P6 30 E Port 5 E Lead 41 T Port 6 P4 31 T Port 6 Transmit Tip 42 T1 Port 6 P5 31 T1 Port 6 Receive Tip 43 E Port 6 P6 31 E Port 6 E Lead 44 T Port 7 P4 32 T Port 7 Transmit Tip 45 T1 Port 7 P5 32 T1 Port 7 Receive Tip 46 E Port 7 P6 32 E Port 7 E Lead 47 T Port 8 P4 33 T Port 8 Transmit Tip 48 T1 Port 8 P5 33 T1 Port 8 Receive Tip 49 E Port 8 P6 33 E Port 8 E Lead 50 SB P7 26 33 SB Signal Battery Ports 1 8 Ports 1 8 E 20 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments 3 Amphenol Plugs to 4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P2 1 of 2 P2 Pin Designation Connects To Pin Designation Function 1 R Port 1 P4 9 R Port 9 Transmit Ring 2 R1 Port 1 P5 9 R1 Port 9 Receive Ring 3 M Port 1 P6 9 M Port 9 M Lead 4 R Port 2 P4 10 R Port 10 Transmit Ring 5 R1 Port 2 P5 10 R1 Por
298. system and test status voice card status for all eight ports for each card channel status for all DS0 assignments for all time slots of the T1 network interface channel status for all DSO assignments for all time slots of the DSX 1 interface and all port assignments for each voice and data port of both the NAM and APM cards Front Panel Provides test jacks to monitor the unit s T1 network and DSX 1 interfaces and LEDs to monitor the unit and its interfaces Test jacks Accessed by removing the housing s bezel provide T1 network and DSX 1 monitoring LEDs Visible without removing the bezel provide unit and interface monitoring that includes T1 network and DSX 1 interface received signal status as well as synchronous data port statuses 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 1 9 About the T1 Access Mux Extensive Statistics Gathering Provides a complete view of the network s and each data port s performance through the statistical data collected from those interfaces to assist in determining the duration of a condition or event A total of 96 intervals 24 hours of user and Telco statistical data is kept seven per screen page over a 24 hour period in 15 minute intervals A total of 32 intervals 8 hours of Synchronous Data Port statistical data is kept over an 8 hour period in 15 minute intervals Quick and easy access to any of the 96 sets of statistics is provided by selecting a specific interval or occurrence
299. t a DSX 2 In DSX 2 Monitor In DSX 2 Out DSX 2 Monitor Out The following figure is an example of using these test jacks m DSX OUT to allow test equipment to terminate the signal coming from equipment e g a PBX attached to the DSX port on the rear of the T1 access unit m DSX IN to allow test equipment to provide a signal to equipment e g a PBX attached to the DSX port on the rear of the T1 access unit Front Rear Test Out Out Equipment Internal Circuitry PBX Test In i Equipment T1 Access Unit 97 15682 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Troubleshooting The following figure is an example of using the monitor test jacks DSX MON IN to allow test equipment to nonintrusively monitor the signal being sent from the T1 access unit to equipment e g a PBX attached to the DSX port on the rear of the T1 access unit DSX MON OUT to allow test equipment to nonintrusively monitor the signal being sent equipment e g a PBX attached to the DSX port on the rear of the T1 access unit Front Rear Test Rx Equipment Mon In Internal Circuitry PBX lt Test Rx Mon Out Equipment T1 Access Unit 97 15680 Sync Data APM Front Panel LEDs VANG ONAS 6016 LEDs 97 15679 9161 A2 GH30 30 The Sync Data APM has five LED status indicators General Status LED Label Indication Color What It Means OK Power and Green ON A
300. t 10 Receive Ring 6 M Port 2 P6 10 M Port 10 M Lead 7 R Port 3 P4 11 R Port 11 Transmit Ring 8 R1 Port 3 P5 11 R1 Port 11 Receive Ring 9 M Port 3 P6 11 M Port 11 M Lead 10 R Port 4 P4 12 R Port 12 Transmit Ring 11 R1 Port 4 P5 12 R1 Port 12 Receive Ring 12 M Port 4 P6 12 M Port 12 M Lead 13 R Port 5 P4 13 R Port 13 Transmit Ring 14 R1 Port 5 P5 13 R1 Port 13 Receive Ring 15 M Port 5 P6 13 M Port 13 M Lead 16 R Port 6 P4 14 R Port 14 Transmit Ring 17 R1 Port 6 P5 14 R1 Port 14 Receive Ring 18 M Port 6 P6 14 M Port 14 M Lead 19 R Port 7 P4 15 R Port 15 Transmit Ring 20 R1 Port 7 P5 15 R1 Port 15 Receive Ring 21 M Port 7 P6 15 M Port 15 M Lead 22 R Port 8 P4 16 R Port 16 Transmit Ring 23 R1 Port 8 P5 16 R1 Port 16 Receive Ring 24 M Port 8 P6 16 M Port 16 M Lead 25 SG P7 9 16 SG Signal Ground Ports 1 8 Ports 9 16 April 1998 E 21 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments 3 Amphenol Plugs to 4 Amphenol Plugs Cable for P2 2 of 2 P2 Pin Designation Connects To Pin Designation Function 26 T Port 1 P4 34 T Port 9 Transmit Tip 27 T1 Port 1 P5 34 T1 Port 9 Receive Tip 28 E Port 1 P6 34 E Port 9 E Lead 29 T Port 1 P4 35 T Port 10 Transmit Tip 30 T1 Port 1 P5 35 T1 Port 10 Receive Tip 31 E Port 1 P6 35 E P
301. t Display Cross Connect gt Network to Network Assignments 2 The Network to Network Assignments screen appears This screen contains a matrix of the current cross connect status of all time slots on the Network 1 interface 3 Move the cursor to the next editable timeslot underlined Use the spacebar or type in the desired timeslot to display the desired timeslot assignment 4 Repeat Step 3 until all desired timeslots are assigned Select Save to save the assignments or press ESC to save and return to the Cross Connect menu Network to Network Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning The second page of the Network to Network Assignments screen enables you to define the signaling assignments and trunk conditioning for each timeslot on the Network 1 interface Only those Network to Network assignments from page 1 are displayed on this page from left to right and top to bottom in ascending order by network timeslot See DSX 1 Signaling Assignments and Trunk Conditioning on page 5 40 for more information Enter one of the values shown in Table 5 8 in each of the fields on both the Network 1 side and the Network 2 side Although you can choose any value for the Network 2 side except None the default value displayed is based on a typical setting that would be used with the corresponding Network 1 side value Typical pairs of values are shown in Table 5 8 with the Network 1 side on the left side of the table and the Network 2
302. t of slots consisting of the NAM and all APMs associated with it The slot order sequence consists of the slot assignment for the APMs in order from lowest 02 to highest 05 for 5 slot housing slot number The following information is available for viewing Use the right and left arrow keys to scroll additional text into view View this field To find the APM Type APM type Sync Data DSX 1 E amp M Voice FXS Voice FXO Voice OCU 2 or OCU 6 Serial Number APM s 7 digit serial number Software Revision APM s software version level 6 digit of the installed firmware The software revision will be the same as the NAM software revision if the APM has no processor code of its own Hardware Revision APM s hardware revision level 7 digit of the main circuit card assembly CCA 1 The APM Type field can also display Empty If the APM slot is empty and was not previously configured Unsupport If an unrecognized APM is installed Misconfig If a misconfiguration condition occurs Refer to ASCII Alarm Messages in Chapter 9 Troubleshooting Failed The APM was removed from the slot or the APM is not operational Displaying System and Test Status Use the System and Test Status screen to display information concerning m System Health and Status Self Test results Status of tests currently running 7 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying System Information Chapter
303. t s EDL Far End Performance Statistics Possible Settings Disable Maintain Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the T1 access unit maintains far end performance statistics and sends Performance Report Messages PRMs for the synchronous data port Far End Performance Statistics does not appear if EDL is set to Disable Management Link is set to FDL NOTE Ifthe local T1 access unit is configured to maintain far end performance statistics then the remote T1 access unit must be configured to send near end performance statistics Disable Does not monitor the port s EDL for PRMs or maintain far end performance statistics Maintain Monitors the port s EDL for PRMs and maintains far end performance statistics Out of Frame OOF Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Out of Frame OOF Specifies whether an alarm is generated when an out of frame condition is detected on the synchronous data port Out of Frame does not appear if Embedded Data Link is set to Disable Management Link is set to FDL on the Network Interface Options screen see Table 5 1 Enable Generates an alarm Disable Does not generate an alarm 5 22 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 3 Synchronous Data Port Options 7 of 7 Excessive Error Rate EER Alarm Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Specifies wh
304. t transmit or receive data If time slots are assigned to the DSX 1 interface when an attempt is made to disable this configuration option the message This action will clear all DSX 1 Cross Connections Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Yes The following occurs All existing DSX 1 interface cross connect assignments are cleared Alarms or traps associated with the DSX 1 interface are not generated LEDs associated with the DSX 1 interface are held in an off state Line Framing Format Possible Settings D4 ESF Default Setting ESF Specifies the framing format for transmitted and received signals on the DSX 1 interface D4 Uses D4 framing format ESF Uses Extended Superframe ESF framing format Line Coding Format Possible Settings AMI B8ZS Default Setting B8ZS Specifies the line coding format for the DSX 1 interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression B8ZS line coding format 5 14 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 2 DSX 1 Interface Options 2 of 3 Line Equalization Possible Settings 0 133 133 266 266 399 399 533 533 655 Default Setting 0 133 Permits a standard DSX signal to be delivered over a distance of up to 655 feet 0 133 Equalization on the DSX 1 side allows up to 133 feet of cable between the
305. t value then the oldest interval is displayed April 1998 7 13 Displaying System Information Displaying Performance Statistics Use the following menu sequence to display network performance statistics Main Menu Status gt Performance Statistics gt Network For Network statistics you must select the Network Interface 1 or 2 for which you want to display statistics Only the Model 926x provides Network 2 Use the following menu sequence to display sync data performance statistics Main Menu gt Status gt Performance Statistics 2 Sync Data Port For Sync Data statistics you must select the desired slot and port for which to collect statistics Selecting Performance Statistics Intervals for Display Only seven intervals appear on the screen at any one time You can choose which intervals to display on your screen by entering m Interval Number or Time NOTE Interval 01 is the interval occurring just prior to the current one Interval 02 is 2 intervals prior to the current one etc To select intervals You must enter an interval or time on Occurring on and after a Line 16 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded after it Occurring on and before a__ Line 10 The display will include the selected interval plus selected interval or time the 6 intervals recorded before it Bracketing a selected Line 13 The display will incl
306. taining the same port type April 1998 5 35 Setting Up Assigning Cross Connections 5 36 The system allows you to assign data paths between the various interfaces to share the T1 network Assuming that both the Network and DSX 1 interfaces are enabled and that at least one voice port APM is installed you can make the following cross connections m Assign DSX 1 time slots to the Network interface m Assign Network 2 interface timeslots to the Network 1 interface m Assign voice ports to DSX 1 or Network interface timeslots m Assign Sync Data ports to DSX 1 or Network interface timeslots or to another Sync Data port m Assign OCU DP data ports to DSX 1 or Network interface timeslots You can also clear cross connection assignments NOTE Although it is not required it is suggested that you progress through each screen in order from top to bottom April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up The following figures illustrate various cross connection assignments T1 Access Mux Sync Data Port Network T1 Interface DSX 1 98 15983 Assigning Sync Data Ports to Network Interface Timeslots T1 Access Mux Sync Data Port DSX 1 Network T1 Interface 98 15984 Assigning Sync Data Ports to DSX 1 or Network Interface Timeslots 9161 Single TI NAM Only T1 Access Mux Sync Data 24 DSOs with 9161 Single T1 NAM Port 16 DSOs with 9261 Dual TI NAM Sync Data Port DSX 1 Network T1 Interface 98 15985 Assigning
307. tarmJaloenzissskenspEUCPETEUCRERE th EREERUTF PERSE CILEPRERS 7 16 m System Status Messages cc cece teen sees 7 16 System Health and Test Status Messages 0000ee eee eae 7 17 Health and Status Messages 00cc cece eee teens 7 17 Self Test Results Messages 0 020 c cece cece eee eee eae 7 22 Test Status Messages oeoc creci credi er ci cedesi stenda eee eee 7 24 8 Operation and Maintenance LE ciae nr 8 1 LOGGING us ck See egi tees Eng TREE Ea xir Roca eta annes Rr 8 1 Logging QUI iesise nunai ek bETEC REeR RES eERBEi WR RR RR EN Rs 8 2 Stantind s SESSION 2d bed ete decide eL ed Maa d 8 2 Ending a Session secexesuxertexesnPb feteadt be tanevdbiae cs 8 4 m Supported SNMP Traps cruinne ierat wurk nn 8 5 Dialing Out and Sending SNMP Traps 2 00eee eee 8 5 m Maintaining COM Port Directories 0000 0c cece eee 8 6 Displaying Directory Numbers 00 cc eee eee eens 8 6 Changing Directory Numbers 60000c ec ee eee eee eee 8 7 m Changing Device Name 0 0 cece eect nn 8 7 iv April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Contents Hot Swapping OF APMS iconibus hed d i ace Bd ee es 8 8 APMANSGIION nero XEDCPXCPePXeDtX4ber 3er PY rehus 8 8 APM HembVal e entr ERPPXe bre ETECHeR YE BEES 8 9 NAM Removal scssi i aa daaa reca eee e teen aha I ite 8 9 Downloading SoOfQWAre aiai iaaiiai ee eee eed ete ete bet s 8 9 File TANSO a sews ag wee wee lee EEOA
308. tatistics 7 12 sync data port configure sync data ports assigning Sync Data Ports worksheet Synchronous Data APM Synchronous Data Port options 5 17 system Error Messages health messages identity information messages Name Contact and Location Status Messages System Alarm Relay 5 66 System Options worksheet T T1 interfaces configuring Line Interface Cable mass termination cable Network Interface Connector RJ48S network cable T1 Access Unit features T1 access unit resetting 8 13 Tab key TCP 8 9 technical specifications F 1 Telnet limiting access setting up to support 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 Index Telnet Login Required Telnet Session 6 3 Telnet FTP Session options options 5 62 Terminating Impedance ohms FXO FXS Test menu branch SNMP to user interface cross reference D 7 Test Duration test jacks 9 8 Test Status Messages Test Timeout Test Tones 9 34 tests aborting analog loopback available 9 21 data channel loopback data opta psd data port device 9 42 digital loopback DS 0 loopback DTE loopback DTE Payload Loopback interface 9 22 latching loopback line loopback 9 23 9 41 line loopbacks nonlatching loopback OCU loopback OCU DP payload loopback Remote FT1 Data Channel Loopback remote loopback repeater loopback 9 25 send and monitor pattern starting St
309. te and Time Date and Time kept locally by the system 24 hour clock Screen area Selection display and input fields for monitoring and maintaining the system Screen function keys Specific functions that can be performed on the screen System messages and field values System related information valid values for input fields and System Health and Status messages April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Navigating the Screens Keyboard Keys 9161 A2 GH30 30 You can navigate the screens by m Using keyboard keys User Interface Switching between the two screen work areas m Using screen function keys Use the following keyboard keys to navigate within the screens To Press Move cursor between the screen area and Ctrl a the screen function keys area Return to the previous screen Esc Move cursor to the next field Right Arrow on same screen row or Tab on any screen row Move cursor to the previous field Left Arrow on same screen row or Ctrl k Move cursor one position to the left If the Backspace cursor is at the beginning of a field Backspace has no effect Move cursor to the first character of the Ctrl k previous field backtab Display the next valid value for the field Spacebar Delete character that the cursor is on Delete Del Move cursor up one field within a column on the same screen Up Arrow or Ctrl u Move cursor dow
310. tenuation dB 10 00 9 5 9 0 8 5 0 0 4 0 4 5 45 0 Ring Back Tone Enable Disable Trunk Cond in CGA Busy Idle April 1998 A 9 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Device Name O D adii ade able Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold Slot ss 9x62 02 9x65 02 03 04 05 Port p 2 port 1 2 6 port 1 2 3 4 5 6 Port Status Enable Disable Port Rate 56K 64KCC Switched 56 Loopback Detection Enable Disable Loss of Signal Alarm Enable Disable Abnormal Station Code Alarm Enable Disable 64KCC Loop OOF Alarm Enable Disable DDS Network Failure Alarm Enable Disable Loss of Loop Timing Alarm Enable Disable April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 9161 A2 GH30 30 Device Name Menus and Configuration Worksheets Configuration Option Settings Default in Bold From Slot ss 2 Slot 01 02 5 Slot 01 02 03 04 05 From Port p T1 NAM 1 2 Sync Data APM 1 2 3 4 Voice APM 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OCU DP 2 port 1 2 OCU DP 6 port 1 2 3 4 5 6 Type T1 NAM Sync Data FXS Voice FXO Voice E amp M Voice OCU DP To Slot ss 2 Slot All 01 02 5 Slot All 01 02 03 04 05 lowest numbered slot containing the same port type To Port p All 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Perform Copy n a Perform Copy Then Increment n
311. the COM port The T1 access unit searches the COM port s receive data stream for the Connect Indication String If not received within 1 minute the connection times out Only used by the T1 access unit when External Device Commands is set to Other ASCII Text Field Adds to or changes the Connection Indication String maximum 20 characters Refer to the Control Characters table on page 5 60 Clear Clears the connect prefix The COM port s receive data stream is not searched and the Carrier Detect CD lead is used to determine that a connection has been established Connect Indication String only appears if External Device Commands is set to Other Escape Sequence Possible Settings ASCII text entry Clear Default Setting Clear Specifies the COM port s escape sequence used to switch an external device to command mode before commanding the external device to disconnect Only used by the T1 access unit when External Device Commands is set to Other ASCII Text Field Changes the Escape Sequence maximum 20 characters Clear Clears and sets the Escape Sequence No Escape Sequence is sent out Escape Sequence only appears if External Device Commands is set to Other Escape Sequence Delay Sec Possible Settings None 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 Default Setting None Specifies the delay before sending the first character of the escape sequence and the delay after the last character of the e
312. the NAM The clock source will not automatically Switch from internal until the primary clock source returns 1 If the secondary clock was derived from the network contact the network provider 2 Check the clock source connector Network Com Link Down The network communication link is down for the COM port This condition occurs only when the COM port is configured for Net Link and communications between the management system and the T1 access unit is not currently possible for the port 1 Check that the Port Use configuration option is properly set see the Technical Reference for configuration option information 2 Check cables 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 21 Displaying System Information Table 7 2 Health and Status Messages 5 of 5 Message What It Indicates What To Do Device Fail yyyyyyyy The operating software detects an internal error VVyyyyyy represents an eight digit hexadecimal failure code for use by service personnel This condition clears after a reset of the unit Contact your service representative Module MisConfig Slot ss The APM in slot xx is not the one specified in the NAM s configuration table 1 2 1 Replace the APM with the type of APM specified by the configuration table 2 Change the current configuration to reflect the type of APM in the slot To do this edit the configuration accept the APM then save the co
313. the order specified by using the put command 1 NAM control file nam1_ctl ocd 2 NAM Program Low Bank nam2_low ocd 3 NAM Program Hi Bank nam3_hi ocd These files must all be the same version from the same revision level for a successful download 8 10 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Operation and Maintenance p Procedure To perform a download 1 c N O QC 9161 A2 GH30 30 Initiate an FTP session to the device that you are upgrading Type bin to enter binary mode 2 3 4 Type cd system to change to the system directory Type put nam1 ctl ocd to perform a put to the nam1 ctl ocd to start the download If the control file is valid the message nam1 ctl ocd File Transfer Complete displays the write permission will be set on the nam1 low ocd and the device will reset and enter Minimum mode The Alarm LED will light and the OK LED will blink to indicate that the device has entered Minimum mode Reestablish an FTP session to the device Type open P adaress Type bin to enter binary mode Type cd system to change to the system directory Type put nam2 low ocd to perform a put to the nam2 low ocd to start the download If a valid nam2 low ocd that is it has the revision level as nam1 ctl ocd is successfully put and has the proper checksum then the message nam2 low ocd File Transfer Complete displays the file is loaded into system memory the write permission will be set on the nam3 hi oc
314. tible DTE can be directly connected to the DB25 connector V 35 The port is a V 35 compatible DCE A V 35 compatible DTE can be connected to the DB25 connector by using an MS34 to DB25 adapter cable RS449 The port is an RS449 compatible DCE An RS449 compatible DTE can be connected to the DB25 connector by using DB37 to DB25 adapter cable X 21 The port is a V 11 X 21 compatible DCE A V 11 X 21 compatible DTE can be connected to the DB25 connector by using a DB15 to DB25 adapter cable Port Base Rate Possible Settings Nx64 Nx56 Default Setting Nx64 Specifies the base rate for the synchronous data port The data rate for the port is a multiple from 1 to 24 of the base rated specified by this configuration option Nx64 The base rate for the port is 64 kbps The data rate available for the port is Nx64 where N is the number of channels to which the port is cross connected 1 24 Nx56 The base rate for the port is 56 kbps The data rate available for the port is Nx56 where N is a number between 1 and 24 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 17 Setting Up Table 5 3 Synchronous Data Port Options 2 of 7 Transmit Clock Source Possible Settings Internal External Default Setting Internal Determines whether the transmitted data is clocked by the synchronous data port internal clock or by the clock supplied by the DTE connected to the synchronous data port Internal The D
315. timeframe Specifying an occurrence timeframe is useful when you know about what time a specific event occurred You can select a set of statistics to display at the following times following an event preceding an event immediately preceding and following an event or only those statistics that occurred at or after the event that is the specified interval or time Statistics collected measure or count the following errored unavailable severely errored and bursty errored seconds as well as controlled slip seconds and loss of frame counts In addition yellow alarm loss of signal excessive error rate frame synchronization bit error and line code violation counts are kept for each 15 minute interval The worst interval for each statistic is provided as an additional aid in selecting statistical information surrounding trouble spots Configuration Upload Download and Software Download Capability Provides quick cost effective software upgrades and quick transfer of configuration options to and from nodes using a standard file transfer protocol FTP Security Provides multiple levels of security which prevents unauthorized access to the unit Security can be controlled by Disabling any form of access to the unit Requiring logins login ID password access level combinations with three access levels to select from read only limited access and full access Enabling SNMP management and specifyi
316. ting B8ZS Specifies the line coding format for the network interface AMI Uses Alternate Mark Inversion AMI line coding format B8ZS Uses Bipolar 8 Zero Suppression B8ZS line coding format Line Build Out LBO Possible Settings 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Default Setting 0 0 Specifies the line build out for the signal transmitted to the network 0 0 7 5 15 22 5 Specifies line build out in dB Bit Stuffing Possible Settings 62411 Part68 Disable Default Setting 62411 Determines the type of bit insertion to provide ones density requirements for data transmitted to the network Bit Stuffing does not appear if Line Coding Format is set to B8ZS 62411 Inserts a one in the data after 15 consecutive zeros are received or the density of ones falls below 12 5 This setting complies with AT amp T TR 62411 Part68 Inserts a one in the data if 80 consecutive zeros are received or the density of ones falls below 12 5 Disable Does not enforce ones density on the data sent to the network Network Initiated LLB Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Enable Allows the initiation and termination of the line loopback LLB to be controlled by the receipt of LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands from the network Enable LLB is controlled by LLB Actuate and LLB Release commands Receiving a LLB Actuate command causes the NAM to enter a line loopback
317. tion Edit Display User Interface Communication Port Or set the Management Link configuration option to FDL or DDL and set the IP address see Table 5 12 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display Network Interface Options Or set the Embedded Data Link configuration option to Enable for the Synchronous Data Port and set the IP address see Table 5 3 Follow this menu selection sequence Configuration Edit Display gt Synchronous Data Port Options April 1998 5 61 Setting Up Table 5 12 Telnet FTP Session Options 1 of 2 Telnet Session Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the unit responds to a Telnet session request from a Telnet client on an interconnected IP network Enable Allows Telnet sessions between the unit and Telnet client Disable Telnet sessions are not allowed Telnet Login Required Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether a user ID and password is required to sign on the async terminal interface through a Telnet session If required the login used is the same login used for an async terminal interface session Enable Requires a user ID and password to sign on a Telnet session Disable Does not require a user ID and password to sign on a Telnet session Session Access Level Possible Settings Level 1 Level 2 Level 3 Default Setting Level 1
318. tional portion of Frame has been detected OCU DP port for the the link carrying this at OCU DP port in slot ss identified slot and port port s data Contact port p network provider month day year Alarm condition no No action needed hours minutes seconds longer exists Alarm Cleared for a 64KCC Loop Out Of Frame at OCU DP port in slot ss port p April 1998 9 17 Troubleshooting System Error Messages 9 18 These messages listed in alphabetical order appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens see Table 9 2 Table 9 2 System Error Messages Message What It Indicates What To Do Invalid Character x 1 An invalid character has been entered Reenter information using valid characters Invalid Already Active Test was already in progress when it was selected No action needed Invalid Password Login is required and an incorrect password was entered access is denied 1 Try again 2 Contact your system administrator to verify your password Invalid Test Combination A conflicting loopback or pattern test was in progress when Start was selected to start another test or was active on the same or another interface when Start was selected 1 Wait until other test ends and message clears 2 Stop the test from the same Screen the test was started from 3 Cancel all tests from the Test screen Path main test Limit of six Login IDs r
319. topping a Test on page 9 43 gt Procedure To abort all tests on all interfaces 1 Follow this menu selection sequence Main Menu gt Test 2 Select Abort All Tests and press Return Command Complete appears when all tests on all interfaces have been terminated NOTE Abort All Tests does not interrupt DTE initiated loopbacks Determining Test Status and Results Current test status and results are available on the m Test screen from where you execute the test m System and Test Status screen m NMS m TestLED For more information on interpreting results and messages see Chapter 7 Displaying System Information 9 44 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Menus The following menus give you a graphical representation of the system options that appear on the async terminal screens Not all options are available but are filtered depending on what other options have been selected 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 A 1 Menus and Configuration Worksheets Menu MAIN MENU Test Configuration Control Status System and Test S tatus Voice Status Cross Connect Status Performance Statistics Identity Network Sync Data Ports Clear Statistics Network Channel Display DSX 1 Channel Display Port Assignment Display MAIN MENU Status Test Control Load Configuration from Configuration Edit Disp Network DSX 1 Sync Data Ports Vo
320. training distributor locations or Paradyne worldwide office locations use one of the following methods m Via the Internet Visit the Paradyne World Wide Web site at http www paradyne com m Via Telephone Call our automated call system to receive current information via fax or to speak with a company representative Within the U S A call 1 800 870 2221 Outside the U S A call 1 727 530 2340 Trademarks All products and services mentioned herein are the trademarks service marks registered trademarks or registered service marks of their respective owners ED Printed on recycled paper A July 1998 9161 A2 GH30 31 Important Regulatory Information EMI Warnings A WARNING This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense The authority to operate this equipment is conditioned by the requirements that no modification
321. ts are made using the Cross Connect configuration option See Assigning Cross Connections in Chapter 5 Setting Up for making time slot assignments Use the Cross Connect Status screen to display time slot assignments for m Network Channels m DSX 1 Channels m Ports Displaying Network Channels Use the Network Channel Display screen to display DSO assignments for each DSO on the network interface This screen also provides information on the slot assignment for each NAM or APM type Use the following menu sequence to display network channel information Main Menu Status gt Cross Connect Status Network Channel Display Select the desired network interface 1 for Network 1 2 for Network 2 only the Model 926x provides Network 2 The Network Channel Display screen displays 24 two field entries in three rows Together each two field entry defines the assignment for one Network interface time slot The top field represents the time slot of the Network Interface The bottom field represents the cross connect status of the associated top field network time slot The following information is available for viewing The Network Time Slot Fields top Indicates N01 to N24 The Network Interface time slot 01 to 24 The Cross Connect Status Field bottom Indicates Unassgn The time slot is unassigned SssPp The voice or sync data port p of slot ss is assigned to the Network Interface time
322. tting Up Recommended Order of Configuration The menu tree is organized in the recommended order of configuration See Appendix A Menus and Configuration Worksheets for a graphical view of the system layout Use the worksheets to keep track of the configuration option settings Configuration Option Areas The T1 access unit offers four configuration option storage areas Configuration Option Area Description Current Configuration The T1 access unit s set of currently active configuration options Customer Configuration 1 The first of two alternate sets of configurations that can be set up by the customer and stored for future use Customer Configuration 2 The second of two alternate sets of configurations that can be set up by the customer and stored for future use Default Factory Configuration A read only configuration area containing the factory default configuration options You can load and edit the default factory configuration settings but you can only save those changes to the Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas The Current Customer 1 and Customer 2 configuration option areas are identical to the Default Factory Configuration until modified by the customer Accessing and Displaying Configuration Options To access and display the configuration options you must first load copy the applicable configuration option set into the edit area NOTE If your
323. ude the selected interval plus interval or time the 3 intervals recorded before it and the 3 intervals recorded after it 7 14 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Displaying System Information Example of Network Performance Statistics Screen main status performance network 9162 Device Name Node A 01 26 96 23 32 NETWORK 1 PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Current Interval Timer ESF Error Events Telco 124 User 124 Telco 15 User 12 ES UAS SES BES CSS LOFC Status Time Tel Usr Tel Usr Tel Usr Tel Usr Tel Usr Tel Usr User Current 10 37 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Y Line 10 int Ole 10 35 Int 02 10 20 Int 03 10 05 Line 13 Int 04 09 50 Int 05 09 35 Int 06 09 20 Line 16 Int 07 09 05 Line 18 Worst Interval 24 24 14 14 14 14 09 09 16 Tel Tot valid 96 00010 00000 00000 00000 002 Usr Tot valid 96 00010 00000 00000 00000 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrStats Example of Sync Data Performance Statistics Screen main status performance port 9162 Device Name Node A 01 26 96 23 32 SYNC DATA PORT PERFORMANCE STATISTICS Current Interval Timer Error Events Near 32 Far 120 Slot 03 Data Port 4 Near 3 Far 10 oES UAS SES BES LnOEC Complete Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far Near Far Far Current 10 37 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 no Line 10 Int 01 10 35 yes Int 02 10 20 yes Int 03 10 05 yes Line 13 Int 04 09 50
324. ut 1 DCE Received Data RXD Out 2 Signal Ground SG 3 DCE Transmit Data TXD In 4 DCE Data Terminal Ready DTR In 5 DCE Carrier Detect CD Out 6 DCE Request to Send RTS In 7 DCE Received Clock RXC Out 8 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 E 1 Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments COM Port to PC Cable This cable comes with the T1 access unit The following shows the pin assignments from the COM port to the DTE interface COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position DTE Modular Plug DB9 Socket No Connection Tx Clock Rx Data Rx Data Signal Ground Tx Data DTR CD RTS Rx Clock Signal Ground Tx Data DTR CD CTS DSR RTS No Connection Oo O FW QO nm 97 14909 01 COM Port to Terminal Printer Cable Order this cable when connecting the COM port to a terminal or printer rather than to a PC it does not come with the T1 access unit The following shows the pin assigaments from the COM port to the DTE interface COM Port Non Keyed 8 Position DTE Modular Plug DB25 Plug Tx Clock Rx Data Signal Ground Tx Data Rx Data Signal Ground Tx Data DTR CD RTS Rx Clock 97 14910 01 E 2 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 COM Port to Modem Cable Cables Connectors and Pin Assignments Order this cable when connecting the COM port to a modem or other external device The following shows the pin assignments from the COM port to t
325. ve been halted All tests have been halted on an interface C 4 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 SNMP Traps The tests that support these traps and conditions that define enterpriseTestStart and enterpriseTestStop for each interface Interface enterpriseTestStart Stop Variable Bindings For These Tests Network and DSX 1 T1 Interfaces a iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 All dsx1SendCode Remote Line Loopback ane ae Send 511 pattern Send 3 in 24 Send QRSS dsx1LoopbackConfig Line Loopback RFC 1406 Payload Loopback devDS1TestType devDS1Config mib Repeater Loopback Send All Zeroes Send All Ones Send 1 in 8 Send 63 Send 2047 Send 215 1 Send 229 1 Send user defined pattern All Monitor patterns Synchronous Data Ports iflndex RFC 1573 ifAdminStatus RFC 1573 ifOperStatus RFC 1573 ifType RFC 1573 devSyncPortTestType devDataPortConfig mib DTE Loopback DTE Payload Loopback Data Channel Loopback Send V 54 Loopback Send FT1 Loopback Send pattern tests Monitor pattern tests 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 C 5 SNMP Traps C 6 enterpriseTestStart Stop Interface Variable Bindings For These Tests OCU Ports m iflndex RFC 1573 Latching CSU and DSU ifAdminStatus POOpBaEKS RFC 1573 Nonlatching CSU and DSU k ifOperStalus REC
326. w the revision levels Tx Attenuation dB only appears if Port Status is set to Enable 17 0 to 7 5 Increases or decreases the signal level The more positive the number the greater the signal level Trunk Cond in CGA Possible Settings Busy Idle Default Setting Busy Determines the trunk condition or state that the port is forced into as a result of the Carrier Group Alarm CGA Trunk Cond in CGA only appears if Port Status is set to Enable Busy Forces the port to Busy during a CGA Idle Forces the port to Idle during a CGA 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 5 25 Setting Up For FXO Voice Ports Table 5 5 FXO Voice Slot ss Port p Options 1 of 3 Port Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Specifies whether the FXO voice port is in use and can be configured and assigned to a time slot on the T1 or DSX interface in order to transmit and receive voice frequency signals FXO Voice options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable Enable The port is active and can be configured and assigned to a timeslot Disable The port is not active cannot be configured and does not take up a time slot No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated Existing cross connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared The message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port Are You Sure No appears If
327. work 1 or Network 2 is active on Network n Mon Pttn DSXss p A Monitor pttn test patterns for the DSX 1 interface in slot ss port p is active Mon Pttn Slot ss Port p A Monitor pttn test patterns for the Sync Data port is active on slot ss port p Lamp Test Active The Lamp Test is active causing all LEDs on the T1 NAM and APMs to blink April 1998 7 25 Displaying System Information 7 26 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Operation and Maintenance Startup If security requiring logins has been set up follow the instructions in Logging In below Otherwise follow the instructions in Starting a Session on page 8 2 Logging In When there is no contention for the user interface and a login is required you are presented with the Login screen Up to 10 characters can be entered in the Login ID and Password fields Valid characters include the following m Othrough 9 m athroughz m Athrough Z B gt Procedure To log in 1 Enter your assigned login ID and press Return 2 Enter your password and press Return An asterisk appears in the field for each character entered 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 8 1 Operation and Maintenance If the Login ID Password combination is Then the Valid Main Menu appears Begin your session Invalid Message Invalid Password is displayed on line 24 and the Login screen is redisplayed If an invalid Login ID Password combination is
328. y Sync Data Ports NOTE If the selected Synchronous Data Port is disabled Disable appears on the screen No other options are shown The Synchronous Data Port Options screen appears for Port 1 of the first slot containing a Sync Data APM If desired enter the slot and port number of another sync data port April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 3 Synchronous Data Port Options 1 of 7 Port Status Possible Settings Enable Disable Default Setting Disable Determines whether the synchronous data port is being used and can be configured Synchronous data port options do not appear if Port Status is set to Disable Enable The port is active and can be used to transmit and receive data Disable The port is not active When the port is disabled the following will occur No alarms or traps configured for the port will be generated LED for the port will be held in an Off state Existing cross connect assignments associated with the port will be cleared The message This action will clear any Cross Connections for the Port Are You Sure No appears If you select No The operation is cancelled Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl a key acts as a No Yes Port status is disabled Port Type Possible Settings E530 V 35 RS449 X 21 Default Setting E530 Selects the synchronous data port type for the data port E530 The port is an EIA 530A compatible DCE An EIA 530 compa
329. yes Int 052 09 135 MSS Int 06 09 20 yes Line 16 Int 07 09 05 Ges Line 18 Worst Interval 28 09 Near Tot valid 32 00010 Far Tot valid 32 00010 Ctrl a to access these functions ESC for previous menu MainMenu Exit Refresh PgDn PgUp ClrNear ClrFar 9161 A2 GH30 30 April 1998 7 15 Displaying System Information Clearing Performance Statistics Use the following menu sequence to clear performance statistics Main Menu Status Clear Statistics You can also use the ClrStats function at the bottom of the Performance Statistics screen To clear all Select User performance registers including All network and ports statistics User performance registers for the Network 1 or Network 2 only the Model selected Network Interface 926x provides Network 2 Performance registers for all Sync Data All Sync Data Ports ports NOTE You can only clear User statistics Telco statistics cannot be cleared Status Information Select system and test status information from the Status menu Main Menu gt Status System and Test Status System Status Messages These messages listed in alphabetical order appear in the messages area at the bottom of the screens see Table 7 1 Table 7 1 System Status Messages 1 of 2 Message What It Indicates What To Do Already Active The selected test is currently 1 Allow test to continue i 2 Stop the test Command Complete A system
330. you select No The operation is cancelled Pressing either the Esc or Ctrl a key acts as a No Yes Port status is disabled and any cross connections are cleared Operating Mode Possible Settings FXO FXODN FXODN WINK DPT Default Setting FXO Selects the operating mode for the FXO voice port Operating Mode only appears if Port Status is set to Enable FXO Enables the Foreign Exchange Office FXO mode supporting a bidirectional connection to a PBX phone line This mode uses 4 state signaling A amp B FXODN Enables Foreign Exchange Office Software Defined Network FXODN mode for operation on software defined networks This mode is used by Class 4 switches and uses 2 state signaling A B FXODN WINK Enables the mode FXODN with WINK which is similar to FXODN but in addition provides an indication toward the network interface when the attached analog equipment is ready to receive signaling information This consists of detecting an off hook signal from the network interface which initiates a configurable wink delay followed by a configurable off hook signal back to the network interface DPT The Dial Pulse Terminating DPT mode is similar to FXO except for supporting in coming one way trunks to a PBX direct inward dialing or key system 5 26 April 1998 9161 A2 GH30 30 Setting Up Table 5 5 FXO Voice Slot ss Port p Options 2 of 3 Signaling Type Possible Settings L

Paradyne 8785 Network Card User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents